GB150 3-2011en PDF

GB
ICS 23.020.30
J 74
National Standard of the Peoples Republic of China
GB 150.32011
Partially Replace GB 1501998
Pressure Vessels
Part 3: Design
3
Issue on: November 21, 2011 Implemented on: March 1, 2012
Issued by: General Administration of Quality Supervision, Inspection and Quarantine

of the Peoples Republic of China;
Standardization Administration of the Peoples Republic of China.
Table of Contents
1 Scope..................................................................................................................................................1
2 Normative References........................................................................................................................1
3 Cylinders and Spherical Shells Under Internal Pressure....................................................................2
4 Cylinder and Spherical Shell Under External Pressure......................................................................4
5 Heads ...............................................................................................................................................27
6 Openings and Reinforcements .........................................................................................................70
7 Flange.............................................................................................................................................102
Appendix A (Normative) Noncircular Cross Section Vessels .............................................................150
Appendix B (Normative) Flat Steel Ribbon Wound Cylinder.............................................................187
Appendix C (Informative) Seal Structure ............................................................................................191
Appendix D (Informative) Structure of Welding Joint ........................................................................240
Appendix E (Normative) Basic Design Requirements for Low Temperature Pressure Vessels .........266
Forward
Appendix C and Appendix D of this part in this standard are recommendatory and others
are mandatory.
This standard GB 150 Pressure Vessels consists of the following four parts:
Part 1: General Requirements;
Part 2: Materials;
Part 3: Design;
Part 4: Fabrication, Inspection and Testing, and Acceptance.
This part is Part 3: Design of GB 150 Stationary Pressure Vessels. This part is drafted
according to the rules provided by GB/T 1.12009 Directives for Standardization.
On the basis of Chapter 5~Chapter 9, Appendix C, Appendix D, Appendix G and Appendix J of

GB 1501998, this part was revised and prepared in combination of the actual demand of the design
of basic pressure components of pressure vessels and the revision proposal of the relevant standards
and in order to meet the requirements of Supervision Regulation on Safety Technology for Stationary
Pressure Vessel. The main changes of this part over GB 1501998 are as follows:
Corresponding to Chapter 5 Cylinder and Spherical shell Subjected to Internal Pressure of

the former GB 1501998, Chapter 3 of this part adds the corresponding formulae for design calculation
of wall thickness according to external diameter.
Corresponding Chapter 6 Cylinder and Spherical shell Subjected to External Pressure of

the former GB 1501998, the main content changes in Chapter 4 of this part are:
a) The external pressure curve diagrams are revised and external pressure curve diagrams
corresponding to high-strength materials are added;
b) The selection table of curve diagram of stress coefficient B corresponding to the material
is added;
c) The structural design of reinforcing ring is modified partially.
Corresponding Chapter 7 Heads and Covers of the former GB 1501998, the main content
changes in Chapter 5 of this part are:
a) The design calculation methods for such components as eccentric conical shell, low
pressure flat head, reinforced flat head and stay structure are added;
b) The K coefficient of parts of flat-covers is adjusted;
c) The design method of plastic analysis applicable to full penetration connection for flat
head and cylinder is added;
d) The design method for spherical cap head and conical shell where /R<0.002 is added.
Corresponding to Chapter 8 Opening and Reinforcements of the former GB 1501998,

Chapter 6 of this part enlarges the contents of design calculation methods for opening and opening
i
reinforcement and includes the integral reinforcement design method for the radial parallel and level
connection pipes of cylinder body, by which, the application scope of opening rate may reach 0.9.
Corresponding to Chapter 9 Flanges of the former GB 1501998, the main changes in

Chapter 7 of this part are as follows:
a) The stiffness checking and calculation requirements of the integral flange and the
optional flanges calculated according to integral flange are added;
b) The selection parameters for corrugated tooth gasket design are supplemented.
The contents relevant to design in Appendix C Low Temperature Pressure Vessels of GB

1501998 turn to Appendix E of this part.
Contents of Appendix D, Appendix G and Appendix J of GB 1501998 are included in

Appendix A, Appendix C and Appendix D of this part.
The main adjusted or changed contents are:
a) Appendix B Flat Steel Ribbon Wound Cylinder is added;
b) In Appendix C, the application scope of double-cone ring seal is enlarged;
c) In Appendix D, the welded structure is arranged and supplemented again according to

the practical conditions.
This part was proposed by and is under the jurisdiction of the National Technical Committee on
Boilers and Pressure Vessels of Standardization Administration of China (SAC/TC 262).
Drafting organization of this part: China Special Equipment Inspection and Research Institute,
Sinopec Engineering Incorporation, Tsinghua University, Zhejiang University, Zhejiang University of
Technology, SINOPEC Shanghai Engineering Co., Ltd., and China Huanqiu Contracting & Engineering
Corporation.
Chief drafting staff of this part: Shou Binan, Yang Guoyi, Li Shiyu, Xue Mingde, Xu Feng,
Zheng Jinyang, Gao Zengliang, Sang Rubao, Qin Shujing, Ye Rixin, Feng Qingxiao, Xie Tiejun,
Chen Zhaohui, Chen Zhiwei, Chen Bingbing, Zhang Yingkai, and Zhu Guodong.
The previous editions of the standard replaced by this part are:
GB 1501989 and GB 1501998.
ii
Pressure VesselsPart 3: Design
1 Scope
GB 150.3 specifies the design requirements for the basic pressure parts of pressure vessels.
This part is applicable to the design calculation of cylinders and spherical shells under internal
pressure, cylinders and spherical shells under external pressure, head, openings and reinforcements,
and flanges.
This part provides the basic design requirements for the noncircular cross section vessel (Normative
Appendix A), flat steel ribbon wound cylinders (Normative Appendix B), common hermetically
sealed structures (Informative Appendix C) and structures of welding joints (Informative Appendix
D).
This part also provides the basic design requirements for the low temperature pressure vessels
(Normative Appendix E).
2 Normative References
The following documents are absolutely essential to the application of this part. For dated reference
documents, only the dated versions apply to this part; for undated reference documents, the latest
versions (including all amendments) apply to this part.
GB 150.12011 Pressure VesselsPart 1: General Requirements
GB 150.2 Pressure VesselsPart 2: Materials
GB 150.4 Pressure VesselsPart 4: Fabrication, Inspection and Testing, and Acceptance
GB/T 985.1 Recommended Joint Preparation for Gas Welding, Manual Metal Arc Welding,
Gas-shield Arc Welding and Beam Welding
GB/T 985.2 Recommended Joint Preparation for Submerged Arc Welding
JB/T 4700 Type and Specification for Pressure Vessel Flanges
JB/T 4701 A-type Socket-weld Flange
JB/T 4702 B-type Socket-weld Flange
JB/T 4703 Welding Neck Flange
JB/T 4704 Nonmetallic Gaskets
JB/T 4705 Spiral Wound Gaskets
JB/T 4706 Double-jacketed Gaskets
JB/T 4707 Stud Bolts
JB/T 4736 Reinforcing Ring
1
3 Cylinders and Spherical Shells Under Internal Pressure
3.1 The calculation formulae of this chapter are applicable to single-layer, wrapped layered and shrink
fit cylinders and spherical shells. The design calculation for the flat steel ribbon wound cylinder shall
be in accordance with Appendix B.
3.2 Terms, Definitions and Symbols
3.2.1 The terms and definitions in GB 150.1 are applicable to this part.
3.2.2 Symbols
CThe additional thickness (according to GB 150.1), mm; the C value of inner cylinder only
will be considered for the wrapped layered cylinders and the shrink fit cylinders;
DiThe internal diameter of cylinder or spherical shell, mm;
DoThe external diameter of cylinder or spherical shell (Do=Di+2n), mm;
pcThe design pressure, MPa;
[pw]The maximum allowable operating pressure of cylinder or spherical shell, MPa;
The calculated thickness of the cylinder or spherical shell, mm;
nThe effective thickness of cylinder or spherical shell, mm;
iThe nominal thickness of the inner cylinder of wrapped layered cylinder or shrink fit
cylinder, mm;
nThe nominal thickness of cylinder or spherical shell, mm;
oThe total thickness of the plate layers for wrapped layered cylinder and the shrink fit
layers for shrink fit cylinder, mm;
tThe calculated stress of cylinder or spherical shell at the design temperature, MPa;
[]tThe allowable stress of the materials for cylinder or spherical shell at design temperature
(according to GB 150.2), MPa;
[i]tThe allowable stress of the inner cylinder materials for wrapped layered cylinder or shrink
fit cylinder at the design temperature (according to GB 150.2), MPa;
[o]tThe allowable stress of the plate layer materials for wrapped layered cylinder or of the
shrink fit layer materials for shrink fit cylinder, MPa;
Welding joint coefficient;
iThe welding joint coefficient of the inner cylinder for wrapped layered cylinder and
shrink fit cylinder;
oThe welding joint coefficient of the plate layer for wrapped layered cylinder and of the
shrink fit layer for shrink fit cylinder.
3.3 Cylinder calculation
The application scope of formulae in this section is: pc0.4[]t. The calculated thickness of the
2
cylinder at design temperature shall be calculated according to Formula (3-1) or (3-2):
pc Di
= (3-1)
2[ ]t pc
pc Do
= (3-2)
2[ ]t pc
The calculated stress of cylinder shall be calculated according to Formula (3-3) or Formula (3-4):
pc ( Di + e )
t = (3-3)
2 e
pc ( Do + e )
t = (3-4)
2 e
The value of t shall be less than or equal to []t.
The []t value of wrapped layered cylinder and shrink fit cylinder shall be calculated according
to Formula (3-5):
i
[ ]t = [ i ]t i + o [ o ]t o (3-5)
n n
Where: i=1.0, o=0.95.
The maximum allowable operating pressure of cylinder at the design temperature shall be
calculated according to Formula (3-6) or Formula (3-7):
2 e [ ]t
[ pw ] = (3-6)
Di + e
2 e [ ]t
[ pw ] = (3-7)
Do e
3.4 Spherical shell calculation
The application scope of formulae in this section is: Pc0.6[]t. The calculated thickness of
spherical shell at the design temperature shall be calculated according to Formula (3-8) or Formula
(3-9).
pc Di
= (3-8)
4[ ]t pc
pc Do
= (3-9)
4[ ]t + pc
3
The calculated stress of spherical shell shall be calculated according to Formula (3-10) or
Formula (3-11):
pc ( Di + e )
t = (3-10)
4 e
pc ( Do e )
t = (3-11)
4 e
The value of t shall be less than or equal to []t.
The maximum allowable operating pressure of spherical shell at the design temperature shall be
calculated according to Formula (3-12) or Formula (3-13):
4 e [ ]t
[ pw ] = (3-12)
Di + e
4 e [ ]t
[ pw ] = (3-13)
Do e
4 Cylinder and Spherical Shell Under External Pressure
4.1 The requirements in this Chapter are applicable to the design for the cylinder (including tube)
and spherical shell under external pressure.
4.2 Terms, definitions and symbols
4.2.1 The terms and definitions in GB 150.1 are applicable to this chapter.
4.2.2 Symbols
AThe gauge factor for external pressure;
AsThe cross sectional area of the reinforcing ring, mm2;
BThe stress coefficient for external pressure, MPa;
CThe additions to the thickness (according to GB150.1), mm;
DiThe internal diameter of cylinder, mm;
DoThe external diameter of cylinder (Do=Di+2n), mm;
EtMaterial elasticity modulus at design temperature, MPa;
hiThe depth of the curved surface of head, mm;
IThe inertia moment required in the combined segment of the reinforcing ring and the
cylinder, mm4;
IsThe moment of inertia required by the composite section of effective sections

strengthening the reinforcing ring and cylinder to the section centroidal axis parallel
4
with the cylinder axis, mm4;
pcThe calculated external pressure (according to the general requirements of GB 150.1),

MPa;
[p]The allowable external pressure, MPa;
RoThe external radius of spherical shell, mm;
nThe nominal thickness of cylinder or spherical shell, mm;
eThe effective thickness of cylinder or spherical shell, mm;
[]tThe allowable stress of cylinder material or tube material at design temperature (according
to GB 150.2 Materials), MPa;
ReL(Rp0.2)The yield strength of the cylinder material or tube material at ambient temperature (or
0.2% of the non-proportional elongation strength), MPa;
RteL(Rtp0.2)The yield strength of the cylinder material or tube material at design temperature (or
0.2% of the non-proportional elongation strength), MPa.
4.3 Stability checking for cylinder under external pressure
4.3.1 Determination of calculated length
The calculated length of cylinder shall be the distance between the two adjacent supporting lines
on cylinder (detailed in Figure 4-1). And the following requirements shall be met: the effective
thickness of the conical shell or flanging section shown in Figure a-2) and Figure c-2) shall not be less
than that of the cylinder connected; the inertia moment at the joint between the conical shell and the
cylinder shown Figure b), e) and f) shall comply with 5.6.6; L shown in the figures, the diameter of
each section and the corresponding thicknesses shall be adopted in calculation.
a) As shown in Figure 4-1 a), if no reinforcing ring (or other components that may be used for
reinforcement) is set on the cylinder, the calculated length shall be the total length of cylinder plus 1/3
of the depth of curved face at the convex head;
b) As shown in Figure 4-1 c), if reinforcing rings (or other components that may be used for
reinforcement) is set on the cylinder, then the calculated length shall be the maximum distance
between the center lines between the adjacent reinforcing rings;
c) As shown in Figure 4-1 d), the calculated length shall be the distance from the center line of
the first reinforcing ring of cylinder to the tangent of head plus 1/3 of the depth of curved face at the
convex head;
d) As shown in b), e) and f) in Figure 4-1, where the cylinder is connected with the conical
shell and their joint may be treated as a supporting line, then the calculated length of cylinder shall be
the maximum distance between the joint and the adjacent supporting line; Lx in Figure 4-1 f) refers to
the axial length of the conical shell segment, and its calculated length under external pressure is set as
the equivalent length of Le, which is detailed in 5.6.6;
e) As shown in Figure 4-1 g), as for the cylinder with jacket, the calculated length shall be the
length of the cylinder under external pressure; if the cylinder is with convex head, the calculated
length shall be the above value plus 1/3 of the depth of curved face of the head; if the cylinder is with
5
reinforcing rings (or other components that may be used for reinforcement), the calculated length shall
be calculated according to Figure 4-1 c) and d).
Note: The supporting line means the cross section at this line is with adequate inertia moment to keep free from instability under
external pressure.
a-1) a-2) a-3)
c-1) c-1) d-1)
e) f) g)
Figure 4-1 Calculated Length of Cylinder Under External Pressure
4.3.2 Cylinder where Do/e20
4.3.2.1 Determination of the value of gauge factor A for external pressure
a) The value of the gauge factor A shall be adopted from Figure 4-2 or Table 4-2 according to
L/Do and Do/e;
b) If the L/Do value is larger than 50, then look up the Figure with L/Do=50, if the L/Do value is
less than 0.05, then look up the Figure with L/Do=0.05.
6
4.3.2.2 Determination of gauge factor B for external pressure
a) Look up Table 4-1 with the used material to determine the corresponding B curve diagram of
stress coefficients for external pressure (Figure 4-3~Figure 4-11), and then find the value B through
value A in the determined curve diagram (the intermediate value is given by interpolation method);
b) Where value A exceeds the maximum value under design temperature on the curve, the value
B shall be determined as the ordinate value at the right endpoint of the curve under corresponding
temperature;
c) Where the value A is less than the minimum value under design temperature on the curve,
the value B shall be calculated according to Formula (4-1):
2 AE t
B= (4-1)
3
Table 4-1 Selection List for B Curve Diagram of Stress Coefficients for External Pressure
No. Designation ReL (Rp0.2)/MPa Scope of design temperature/ Applicable B curve diagram
1 10 205 475 Figure 4-3
2 20 245 475 Figure 4-5
3 Q245R 245 475 Figure 4-5
4 Q345R, Q345D 345 475 Figure 4-4
150 Figure 4-6

5 Q370R
370 150~350 Figure 4-5
6 12CrMo 205 475 Figure 4-3
12Cr1MoVG
7 225 475 Figure 4-5
12Cr1MoVR
8 15CrMo 235 475 Figure 4-5
150 Figure 4-6

9 15CrMoR 295
150~400 Figure 4-5
10 1Cr5Mo 195 475 Figure 4-3
11 09MnD 270 150 Figure 4-6
12 09MnNiD 280 150 Figure 4-6
13 08Cr2AlMo 250 300 Figure 4-5
14 09CrCuSb 245 200 Figure 4-5
150 Figure 4-6

15 18MnMoNbR 390
150~475 Figure 4-5
150 Figure 4-6

16 13MnNiMoR 390
150~400 Figure 4-5
150 Figure 4-6

17 14Cr1MoR 300
150~475 Figure 4-5
150 Figure 4-6

18 12Cr2Mo1 280
150~475 Figure 4-5
150 Figure 4-6

19 12Cr2Mo1R 310
150~475 Figure 4-5
7
Table 4-1 (continued)
150 Figure 4-6

20 12Cr2Mo1VR 415
150~475 Figure 4-5
150 Figure 4-6

21 16Mn, 16MnDR 315
150~350 Figure 4-5
150 Figure 4-6

22 15MnNiDR 325
150~200 Figure 4-5
150 Figure 4-6

23 15MnNiNbDR 370
150~200 Figure 4-5
150 Figure 4-6

24 09MnNiDR 300
150~350 Figure 4-5
25 08Ni3DR 320 100 Figure 4-6
26 06Ni9DR 575 100 Figure 4-7
27 07MnMoVR 490 200 Figure 4-7
28 07MnNiVDR 490 200 Figure 4-7
29 12MnNiVR 490 200 Figure 4-7
30 07MnNiMoDR 490 200 Figure 4-7
31 S11348 170 400 Figure 4-3
32 S11306 205 400 Figure 4-5
33 S11972 275 350 Figure 4-5
S30403
34 180 425 Figure 4-10
00Cr19Ni10
S30408
35 205 650 Figure 4-8
0Cr18Ni9
36 S30409 205 650 Figure 4-8
S31608
37 205 650 Figure 4-9
0Cr17Ni12Mo2
S31603
38 180 425 Figure 4-11
00Cr17Ni14Mo2
S31668
39 205 450 Figure 4-9
0Cr18Ni12Mo2Ti
S31008
40 205 650 Figure 4-9
0Cr25Ni20
S31708
41 205 650 Figure 4-9
0Cr19Ni13Mo3
S31703
42 205 425 Figure 4-11
00Cr19Ni13Mo3
S32168
43 205 650 Figure 4-9
0Cr18Ni10Ti
44 S39042 220 650 Figure 4-9
45 S21953 440 300 Figure 4-12
46 S22253 450 300 Figure 4-12
8
47 S22053 450 300 Figure 4-12
48 S25073 550 300 Figure 4-12
49 1Cr19Ni9 205 650 Figure 4-8
Coefficient A
Figure 4-2 Curve of Gauge Factor A for External Pressure

9
Coefficient A
Note: It is used for carbon steel with a yield strength ReL<207MPa and Steel S11348, etc..
Figure 4-3 Curve of Stress Coefficient B for External Pressure
Coefficient A
Note: It is used for steel Q345R.
10
Coefficient A
Note: It is used for carbon steel, low alloy steel, steel S11306, etc., with a yield strength ReL>207MPa, except materials indicated in
Figure 4-4.
Coefficient A
Note: It is used for carbon steel, low alloy steel, etc., with yield strength ReL>260MPa, except materials indicated in Figure 4-4.
11
Coefficient A
Note: It is used for steel 07MnMoVR, etc..
Coefficient A
Note: It is used for steel S30408, etc..
12
Coefficient A
Coefficient A
13
Coefficient A
Ambient temperature
Coefficient A
4.3.2.3 Determination of allowable external pressure [p]
The allowable external pressure [p] shall be calculated according to value B and using Formula
(4-2):
14
B
[ p] = (4-2)
Do / e
The calculated [p] shall be greater than or equal to pc, otherwise the design parameter shall be
changed and the above-mentioned calculation shall be repeated to meet the design requirements.
4.3.3 Cylinder where Do/e<20
4.3.3.1 Determination of gauge factor A for external pressure
a) As for the cylinder with Do/e4.0, the coefficient A shall be determined through the procedure
in 4.3.2.1;
b) As for the cylinder with Do/e<4.0, the coefficient A shall be given by Formula (4-3):
1.1
A= (4-3)
( Do / e ) 2
4.3.3.2 Determination of stress coefficient B for external pressure
The value of coefficient B shall be determined through the procedure 4.3.2.2.
4.3.3.3 Determination of allowable external pressure [p]
The allowable external pressure [p] shall be calculated according to Formula (4-4):
2.25 2 1
[ p ] = min 0.0625 B 0 1 (4-4)
Do / e Do / e Do / e
Where, stress 0 shall be the smaller value between the following two values:
0=2[]t
0=0.9RteL or 0.9Rtp0.2
adjusted and the above-mentioned calculation shall be repeated until it meets the design requirements.
4.4 Calculation of spherical shell under external pressure
4.4.1 Determination of gauge factor A for external pressure
The coefficient A shall be calculated according to Do/e by using Formula (4-5):
0.125
A= (4-5)
( Ro / e )
4.4.2 Determination of stress coefficient B for external pressure
a) The B curve diagram of stress coefficients for external pressure shall be determined by looking
up Table 4-1 with the used material, and then find the value B through value A in the determined curve
diagram (the intermediate value is given by interpolation method);
15
b) Where the value A exceeds the maximum value under design temperature on the curve, the
value B shall be determined as the ordinate value at the right endpoint of the curve under corresponding
temperature;
c) Where the value A is less than the minimum value under design temperature on the curve,
the value B shall be calculated according to Formula (4-1).
4.4.3 Determination of allowable external pressure [p]
The allowable external pressure [p] shall be calculated according to value B and using Formula
(4-6):
B
[ p] = (4-6)
( Ro / e )
changed and the above-mentioned calculation shall be repeated to meet the design requirements.
4.5 Design of reinforcing ring of cylinder under external pressure
4.5.1 Calculation of reinforcing ring
4.5.1.1 Calculated inertia moment
Adopt reinforcing ring material and cross section dimension; calculate the cross-sectional area As
of the reinforcing ring and the inertia moment Is at the combined section in effective segment combined
by the reinforcing ring and the cylinder; the effective segment of cylinder refers to the shells with an
effective width of 0.55 Do e at both sides of the center line of the reinforcing ring.
If the effective width of the cylinder on both sides of the reinforcing ring center line overlaps the
effective width of the cylinder of the adjacent reinforcing ring, the overlapped part of the effective
width of this cylinder shall be halved;
4.5.1.2 Determination of stress coefficient B for external pressure
The value B shall be calculated by Formula (4-7):
pc Do
B= (4-7)
e + ( As / Ls )
Where LsHalf sum of the distance from the center line of the reinforcing ring to the adjacent
center lines of the reinforcing rings at both sides, if adjacent to the convex head, then
1/3 depth of the head curved surface shall be counted, mm.
4.5.1.3 Determination of gauge factor A for external pressure
a) The B curve diagram of stress coefficients for external pressure shall be determined by looking
up Table 4-1 with the used material, and then find the value A through value B in the determined curve
diagram (the intermediate value is given by interpolation method);
b) Where value B exceeds the maximum value under design temperature on the curve, the
value A shall be determined as the lateral coordinate value at the right endpoint of the curve under
16
corresponding temperature;
c) Where the value B is less than the minimum value under design temperature on the curve,
the value A shall be calculated according to Formula (4-8):
3B
A= (4-8)
2E t
4.5.1.4 Determination of the required inertia moment I
The inertia moment required by the combined segment of the reinforcing ring and the cylinder
shall be calculated according to Formula (4-9):
Do2 Ls ( e + As / Ls )
I= A (4-9)
10.9
Is shall be greater than or equal to I, otherwise, another reinforcing ring with larger inertia moment
shall be selected for repeating above calculation until Is is greater than and approximate to I.
4.5.2 Arrangement of reinforcing ring
4.5.2.1 The reinforcing ring may be arranged inside or outside of the vessel, and shall extend
completely around the periphery of the cylinder. The joint between two ends of the reinforcing ring is
detailed as of A and B of Figure 4-13.
4.5.2.2 Where the reinforcing ring located at the inside of the vessel is arranged as C, D, E or F
shown in Figure 4-13, the cross section with the minimum inertia moment shall be taken for calculation.
4.5.2.3 Any spacing in the portion of the reinforcing ring as D, E and F shown in Figure 4-13 shall
not exceed the arc length given in Figure 4-14, otherwise a connection construction between two
adjacent parts of internal and external reinforcing ring shall be provided as C shown in Figure 4-13. In
case the following four conditions are able to be fully satisfied, the restriction above may be exempted:
a) Only one range of arc length on the shell is allowed to be without supporting in each ring;
b) The arc length of supportless shell shall not exceed 90;
c) The supportless arc length of cylinder in two adjacent reinforcing rings shall be staggered by
180;
d) The calculated length L of the cylinder shall be taken as the larger one among the following
values:
The maximum distance between alternate reinforcing rings;
The distance from the head tangent to the center of the second reinforcing ring plus 1/3
of the depth of the head curved face.
4.5.2.4 If other structure members inside the vessel, such as column tray, are designed for reinforcement,
they may be treated as reinforcing rings.
4.5.2.5 The reinforcing ring may be attached to the cylinder by continuous or intermittent welding,
where the reinforcing ring is arranged outside the vessel, the total length of the intermittent welds at
each side of the reinforcing ring shall not be less than the 1/2 of the cylinder outer periphery, and
17
where the reinforcing ring is inside the vessel, the total length shall not be less than 1/3 of the cylinder
inner periphery. The dimension of weld leg shall not be less than the thickness of the thinner one
between the mutually welded parts.
The intermittent welds may be arranged and have a spacing as the type shown in Figure 4-15, and
the intermittent welds may be staggered or arranged in a row. As for the maximum spacing t, it is 8n
for external reinforcing ring and 12n for internal reinforcing ring.
Spacing (not exceeds 8 tiems of the cylinder nominal thickness)
Butt welding
Cylinder
Spacing
Web of reinforcing ring
Flange of reinforcing ring
Butt welding
Spacing in
reinforcing
ring for
drainage
Strut member
Arc length
Arc length
JK cross section
But weld of the

reinforcing ring Cylyinde without reinforcement
Arc length
At least 120
This cross section shall have the inertia moment required for reinforcing ring Support
Figure 4-13 Layout Figure of Reinforcing Ring for Vessel Under External Pressure
18
Arc length
Figure 4-14 Arc Length of Spacing Allowed by Reinforcing Ring on Cylinder
See 4.5.2.5
Figure 4-15 Connection of Reinforcing Ring and the Cylinder
19
Table 4-2 Data Sheet for the Curve in Figure 4-2
Do/e L/D0 Value A Do/e L/D0 Value A Do/e L/D0 Value A
2.2 9.59E-02 1 6.60 5 5.34

2.6 8.84 1.6 3.72 6 5.16
3 8.39 2 2.85 15 10 4.97
4 7.83 2.4 2.42 40 4.90
4 5 7.59 3 2.12 50 4.90
7 7.39 8 4 1.92 0.24 9.82E-02
10 7.29 5 1.84 0.4 4.77
30 7.20 7 1.79 0.6 2.86
50 7.20 10 1.76 0.8 2.03
1.4 9.29E-02 20 1.74 1 1.56
1.6 8.02 50 1.74 1.2 1.27
2 6.58 0.56 9.64E-02 2 7.13E-03
2.4 5.86 0.7 7.20 20 3 4.46
3 5.32 1 4.63 3.4 3.88
5 4 4.94 1.2 3.71 4 3.42
5 4.78 2 2.01 5 3.08
7 4.65 2.4 1.65 7 2.87
10 4.59 10 3 1.39 10 2.80
30 4.54 4 1.24 40 2.75
50 4.53 5 1.18 50 2.75
1.2 8.37E-02 7 1.14 0.2 8.77E-02

1.6 5.84 10 1.12 0.3 4.84
2 4.69 16 1.11 0.5 2.50
2.4 4.11 50 1.11 0.8 1.43
3 3.69 0.34 9.68E-02 1 1.11
6 4 3.41 0.4 7.70 1.2 9.02E-03
5 3.29 0.6 4.53 25 2 5.08
7 3.20 1 2.44 3 3.23
10 3.16 15 1.2 1.97 3.4 2.78
30 3.12 2 1.09 4 2.35
50 3.12 2.4 8.90E-03 4.4 2.19
0.74 9.68E-02 3 6.91 5 2.04

8
0.8 8.75 4 5.73 6 1.91
7 1.86 1 3.84 30 1.72

80
10 1.80 2 1.71 50 1.72
25
30 1.76 4 8.42E-04 0.05 7.41E-02
50 1.76 5 6.52 0.07 3.98
0.16 9.04E-02 6 5.48 0.1 2.20
50
2 6.35 7 5.02 0.14 1.33
100
0.3 3.57 8 4.78 0.2 8.31E-03
30
0.4 2.46 10 4.58 0.4 3.64
0.6 1.50 12 4.49 0.5 2.83
0.8 1.08 16 4.44 0.8 1.70
20
1 8.38E-03 40 4.40 1 1.34

50
1.2 6.83 50 4.40 2 6.41E-04
2 3.88 0.074 9.54E-02 4 3.05
3 2.46 0.1 5.56 6 1.95
4 1.77 0.14 3.23 100 8 1.42
4.4 1.61 0.2 1.93 10 1.24
30
5 1.47 0.4 8.12E-03 14 1.14
6 1.36 0.6 5.10 25 1.10
7 1.30 0.8 3.71 50 1.10
10 1.25 1 2.91 0.05 4.80E-02
30 1.22 2 1.38 0.06 3.44
60
50 1.22 3 8.86E-04 0.08 2.10
0.12 8.64E-02 4 6.45 0.1 1.48
0.2 3.85 6 4.09 0.14 9.17E-03
0.3 2.22 7 3.64 0.2 5.78
0.4 1.55 8 3.41 0.4 2.57
0.6 9.58E-03 10 3.22 0.6 1.65
0.8 6.91 14 3.10 0.8 1.21
1 5.39 40 3.06 1 9.55E-04

125
1.2 4.41 50 3.06 2 4.59
2 2.52 0.054 9.90E-02 4 2.20

40
4 1.17 0.07 6.08 6 1.41
5 9.12E-04 0.09 3.91 9 9.04E-05
6 8.04 0.1 3.28 10 8.37
7 7.56 0.14 1.96 12 7.70
8 7.31 0.2 1.20 14 7.40
10 7.08 0.24 9.50E-03 20 7.13
16 6.92 0.4 5.16 40 7.04
40 6.88 80 0.6 3.28 50 7.04
50 6.88 0.8 2.39 0.05 3.38E-02
0.088 9.30E-02 1 1.88 0.06 2.44
0.1 7.82 2 8.95E-04 0.08 1.51
0.2 2.63 4 4.24 0.1 1.08

150
50 0.3 1.54 6.6 2.41 0.12 8.33E-03
0.4 1.08 8 2.05 0.16 5.69
0.6 6.77E-03 10 1.86 0.2 4.31
0.8 4.90 14 1.76 0.4 1.94
0.6 1.25 10 2.93 0.08 1.92

1 7.26E-05 12 2.38 0.1 1.45
150 2 3.49 250 14 2.10 500 0.12 1.16
4 1.68 16 1.96 0.16 8.30E-04
6 1.08 20 1.84 0.2 6.45
21
8 7.87E-05 40 1.76 0.4 3.05

250
10 6.19 50 1.76 0.6 1.99
12 5.53 0.05 9.23E-03 0.8 1.48
150 16 5.10 0.06 6.90 1 1.18
20 4.98 0.08 4.52 2 5.79E-05
500
40 4.89 0.1 3.34 4 2.82
50 4.89 0.12 2.64 6 1.85
0.05 1.96E-02 0.2 1.43 8 1.37
0.06 1.43 0.4 6.66E-04 10 1.07
0.08 9.09E-03 0.6 4.33 12 8.80E-06
0.1 6.59 0.8 3.21 0.05 2.70E-03
0.14 4.21 1 2.54 0.06 2.08
300
0.2 2.72 2 1.24 0.08 1.42
0.3 1.71 4 6.02E-05 0.1 1.08
0.5 9.76E-04 6 3.93 0.12 8.68E-04
0.8 5.92 8 2.87 0.16 6.24
1 4.69 10 2.25 0.2 4.86
200 2 2.27 14 1.56 0.4 2.31
600
4 1.10 16 1.42 0.6 1.51
6 7.11E-05 20 1.30 0.8 1.12
8 5.20 40 1.23 1 8.94E-05
10 4.03 50 1.22 2 4.39
12 3.38 0.05 5.49E-03 4 2.16
14 3.09 0.06 4.17 6 1.41
16 2.95 0.08 2.78 8 1.04
20 2.83 0.1 2.08 8.4 9.88E-06
40 2.75 0.12 1.66 0.05 1.65E-03
50 2.75 0.16 1.18 0.06 1.29
0.05 1.29E-02 0.2 9.14E-04 0.08 8.92E-04
0.06 9.55E-03 0.4 4.29 0.1 6.82
0.08 6.17 0.6 2.80 0.12 5.51

400
0.1 4.52 0.8 2.07 0.16 3.98
0.14 2.93 1 1.65 0.2 3.12
0.2 1.91 2 8.08E-05 800 0.4 1.49
0.4 8.81E-04 4 3.93 0.6 9.80E-05

250
0.6 5.72 6 2.57 0.8 7.28
0.8 4.22 8 1.89 1 5.80
1 3.35 10 1.48 2 2.86
2 1.63 14 1.02 4 1.40
4 7.89E-05 16 8.82E-06 5 1.12
6 5.13 0.05 3.70E-03 5.6 9.92E-06

500
8 3.77 0.06 2.84 1000 0.05 1.13E-03
0.06 8.91E-04 0.16 2.82 1 4.14

0.07 7.33 0.2 2.21 2 2.04
1000 1000 1000
0.09 5.41 0.4 1.06 4 1.01
0.12 3.88 0.7 5.96E-05 4.2 9.57E-06
22
Value Value Value

Temperature/ Value A Temperature/ Value A Temperature/ Value A
B/MPa B/MPa B/MPa
1.00E-05 1.33 2.00E-02 120 5.00 42.7

260
6.20E-04 82.7 1.00E-01 120 6.00 45.3
7.00 92.0 1.00E-05 1.14 7.00 47.0
8.00 96.0 4.09E-04 46.7 1.00E-03 52.0
425
9.00 100 5.00 50.7 1.50 56.0
150
1.00E-03 103 6.00 54.7 2.00 60.0
1.50 111 7.00 56.0 2.00E-02 86.0
2.00 113 8.00 58.7 1.00E-01 86.0
370
9.00 128 9.00 60.0 1.00E-05 0.956
1.00E-01 128 1.00E-03 61.3 3.25E-04 31.0
1.00E-05 1.24 1.50 66.7 5.00 36.0
5.08E-04 62.7 2.00 70.7 7.00 40.0
6.00 68.0 2.00E-02 101 475 1.00E-03 42.7
260 8.00 74.7 1.00E-01 105 1.50 48.0
1.00E-03 77.3 1.00E-05 1.05 2.50 53.3
1.50 85.3 425 3.54E-04 37.3 2.00E-02 78.0
2.50 93.3 4.00 40.0 1.00E-01 78.0
Value Value Value

B/MPa B/MPa B/MPa
1.00E-05 1.33 1.00E-03 82.4 5.00 99.2

1.00E-03 133 1.50 94.4 7.00 106
400
1.50 151 2.00 101 8.00 108
30
2.00 163 3.00 111 1.00E-02 110
300
3.00 171 4.00 117 1.00E-05 0.977
1.00E-02 183 5.00 122 3.90E-04 37.2
1.00E-05 1.24 8.00 129 5.00 41.3
9.30E-04 115 1.00E-02 130 6.00 44.3
1.00E-03 118 1.00E-05 1.05 7.00 47.1
1.50 132 4.00E-04 42.1 8.00 49.4
200 2.00 138 5.00 46.8 9.00 51.8
2.50 142 6.00 51.2 1.00E-03 54.1
475
3.00 146 7.00 54.4 1.50 62.9
4.00 151 8.00 57.2 2.00 68.6
400
1.00E-02 161 9.00 60.0 3.00 77.0
1.00E-05 1.17 1.00E-03 62.8 4.00 82.6
5.00E-04 58.7 1.50 73.2 5.00 86.3
300 6.00 65.6 2.00 80.0 6.00 88.7
7.00 71.2 3.00 88.8 8.00 92.6
8.00 75.7 4.00 95.2 1.00E-02 94.7
23
Value Value Value

B/MPa B/MPa B/MPa
1.00E-05 1.33 3.00 114 1.00E-03 65.3
7.65E-04 101 8.00 132 1.50 73.3
8.00 105 1.00E-02 135 2.00 77.3

425
9.00 109 260 1.50 143 3.00 82.7
1.00E-03 113 2.00 149 3.00E-02 113
150 2.00 137 2.72 156 1.00E-01 113
3.00 149 1.00E-01 156
4.00 156 1.00E-05 0.956

1.00E-05 1.39
5.00 159 4.27E-04 41.3
5.59E-04 62.7
2.50E-02 164 1.00E-03 56.0
1.00E-03 74.7
1.00E-01 164 1.50 62.7
370 3.00 93.3
475 2.00 68.0
1.00E-05 1.24 1.00E-02 112
3.00 73.3
6.63E-04 82.2 2.50 128
8.00 85.3
260 9.00 89.0 1.00E-01 128
3.00E-02 102
1.00E-03 93.3 1.00E-05 1.50
425 1.00E-01 102
2.50 111 5.00E-04 52.0
Yield strength Value B Yield strength Value B Yield strength Value B

Value A Value A Value A
MPa /MPa MPa /MPa MPa /MPa
4.00E-05 5.33 380 1.00E-01 248 1.24 165

310MPa
1.00E-03 133 4.00E-05 5.33 1.00E-01 207
415MPa
1.66 220 1.00E-03 133
345MPa 4.00E-05 5.33
1.00E-01 276 1.38 184
1.00E-03 133
4.00E-05 5.33 1.00E-1 229 260-275MPa
1.10 147
380MPa 1.00E-03 133 4.00E-05 5.33
310MPa 1.00E-01 184
1.52 207 1.00E-03 133
Value A Value B/MPa Value A Value B/MPa Value A Value B/MPa
4.00E-04 53.3 1.00E-03 133 3.00E-02 303
6 80 2 266 6 313
8 106 2.2 293 1.00E-01 327
24
Value Value Value

B/MPa B/MPa B/MPa
1.00E-05 1.29 1.00E-05 1.07 1.50E-03 50.7
4.63E-04 60.0 3.34E-04 36.0 3.00 56.0
0.150E-03 97.3 4.00 40.0 1.00E-02 65.3

480
30 2.00 105 5.00 42.7 2.00 68.0
3.00 115 6.00 45.3 7.00 73.3
1.00E-02 131 1.00E-03 53.3 1.00E-01 73.3

370
1.00E-01 147 2.00 61.3 1.00E-05 0.933
5.00 70.7 2.78E-04 25.3
1.00E-05 1.20
6.00 72.0 1.00E-03 38.7
3.86E-04 46.4
1.00E-02 74.7 2.00 44.0
2.00E-03 76.0
5.00 82.7 5.00 50.7
3.00 84.0
650
205 1.00E-01 82.7 1.00E-02 54.7
4.00 89.3
5.00 93.3 1.00E-05 1.07 2.00 58.7
1.00E-02 98.7 3.09E-04 32.0 5.00 62.7

480
5.00 107 4.00 36.0 1.00E-01 62.7
1.00E-01 107 5.00 38.7
Value Value Value

B/MPa B/MPa B/MPa
1.00E-05 1.29 3.00 104 6.00 56.0
5.88E-04 75.7 4.00 108 1.00E-03 66.7
1.50E-03 103 5.00 111 3.00 84.0
2.00 109 205 6.00 113 480 4.00 88.0
2.50 113 1.00E-02 117 1.00E-02 96.0
3.00 117 5.00 126 5.00 108
30 4.00 120 1.00E-01 126 1.00E-01 108
5.00 123 1.00E-05 1.07 1.00E-05 0.933

7.00 128 5.07E-04 57.3 4.50E-04 42.0
1.00E-02 129 1.00E-03 73.3 1.00E-03 56.0
2.00 136 3.00 93.3 2.00 66.7
7.00 144 4.00 96.0 3.00 73.3
370
1.00E-01 144 1.00E-02 105 650 4.00 76.0
1.00E-05 1.20 5.00 117 5.00 78.7
5.75E-04 68.6 6.00 120 1.00E-02 82.3
205 1.00E-03 81.3 1.00E-01 120 7.00 87.1
1.50 90.7 1.00E-05 1.07
2.00 96.0 480 5.19E-04 53.3
25
Value Value Value

B/MPa B/MPa B/MPa
1.00E-05 1.29 1.00E-03 50.1 315 1.00E-01 77.7
5.24E-04 67.4 1.00E-02 74.9 1.00E-05 1.06

205
2.00E-03 94.7 2.83 89.6 2.70E-04 28.6
30
6.00 115 1.00E-01 89.6 1.50E-03 40.0
2.00E-02 132 1.00E-05 1.13 425 1.00E-02 56.0
1.00E-01 140 3.13E-04 35.3 1.00E-01 66.2
315
1.00E-05 1.20 1.00E-03 44.0
205
3.52E-04 42.0 1.00E-02 66.7
Value Value Value

B/MPa B/MPa B/MPa
1.00E-05 1.29 1.00E-02 103 5.00E-03 66.2
5.87E-04 75.5 150 5.00 119 1.00E-02 72.6

315
7.00E-03 124 1.00E-01 119 4.56 82.7
30 1.00E-02 132 1.00E-05 1.2 1.00E-01 86.7
2.00 143 4.02E-04 50.7 1.00E-05 1.06

5.00 152 7.00E-03 84.0 3.06E-04 33.5
205
1.00E-01 152 1.00E-02 88.0 5.00E-03 56.0
1.00E-05 1.20 4.00 98.7 425 1.00E-02 62.7
4.46E-04 56.5 1.00E-01 98.7 5.00 70.8
150
5.00E-03 93.3 1.00E-05 1.13 1.00E-01 70.8
315
6.00 96.0 3.55E-04 40.0
Value Value Value

B/MPa B/MPa B/MPa
1.41E-04 18.4 1.51E-04 8.4 1.60E-04 18.4
1.34E-03 175 1.17E-03 142 1.20E-03 138
1.50 177 1.50 145 1.50 143
2.00 189 2.00 152 2.00 149
2.50 207 2.50 161 2.50 156

Ambient
3.00 219 205 3.00 168 345 3.00 164
temperature
4.00 239 4.00 179 4.00 175
6.00 260 6.00 193 6.00 187
1.00E-02 280 1.00E-02 207 1.00E-02 201
1.50 289 1.50 214 1.50 207
2.10 300 2.30 221 3.40 210
26
5 Heads
5.1 Scope
The design method specified in this chapter is applicable to convex heads, flat-covers, conical
heads (including eccentric conical shells), reducer andreduced heads under internal or external pressure,
and the stay structures of part under internal pressure. The convex heads include ellipsoidal head,
dished head, spherical cap head (see Figure 5-1, Figure 5-2 and Figure 5-3) and hemispherical head,
hereinto.
The hemispherical head shall be calculated according to those specified in Chapter 3 or Chapter 4.
Figure 5-1 Ellipsoidal Head Figure 5-2 Dished Head Figure 5-3 Spherical Cap Head
5.2.1 For the purpose of this chapter, the terms and definitions defined in GB 150.1 apply.
5.2.2 Symbols
DiThe internal diameter of the head or the internal diameter of the cylinder which connects
the head, mm;
DoThe external diameter of the head or the external diameter of the cylinder which connects
the head, mm;
hiThe depth of inner curved surface of convex head, mm;
pcThe calculating pressure, MPa;
[pw]The maximum allowable operating pressure of the head, MPa;
The calculated thickness of cylinder which connects the head, mm;
eThe effective thickness of cylinder which connects the head, mm;
ehThe effective thickness of convex head, mm;
hThe calculated thickness of convex head, mm;
nThe nominal thickness of cylinder which connects the head, mm;
nhThe nominal thickness of convex head, mm;
rThe calculated thickness of reinforcing section or transition section which connects the
head and cylinder, mm;
27
[]tThe allowable stress of head materials at design temperature (according to GB 150.2),
MPa;
The welding joint coefficient (according to GB 150.1).
5.3 Ellipsoidal Head
5.3.1 Generally, for ellipsoidal heads, a standard type of value 2 of the major to minor axis ratio is
adopted.
5.3.2 Ellipsoidal head under internal pressure (with concave face under pressure)
The calculated thickness of the head shall be calculated according to Formula (5-1) or Formula
(5-2):
Kpc Di
h = (5-1)
2[ ]t 0.5 pc
Kpc Do
h = (5-2)
2[ ] + (2 K 0.5) pc
t
1 D
2
Where KThe shape factor of ellipsoidal head, K = 2 + i , its values are listed in
6 2hi

Table 5-1.
Table 5-1 Values of Factor K
Di
2.6 2.5 2.4 2.3 2.2 2.1 2.0 1.9 1.8
2hi
K 1.46 1.37 1.29 1.21 1.14 1.07 1.00 0.93 0.87
Di
1.7 1.6 1.5 1.4 1.3 1.2 1.1 1.0
2hi
K 0.81 0.76 0.71 0.66 0.61 0.57 0.53 0.50
For the effective thickness of ellipsoidal head where Di/2hi2, it shall not be less than 0.15% of
the internal diameter of the head, for the effective thickness of ellipsoidal head where Di/2hi>2, it shall
not be less than 0.30%. Where the elastic instability under the internal pressure is considered when
determining the head thickness, the effective thickness may not be limited by the above requirements.
The maximum allowable operating pressure of the ellipsoidal head shall be calculated according
to Formula (5-3):
2[ ]t eh
[ pw ] = (5-3)
KDi + 0.5 eh
5.3.3 Ellipsoidal head under external pressure (with convex surface under pressure)
The thickness calculation for ellipsoidal head with convex surface under pressure shall adopt the
design method of external pressure spherical shell stated in Chapter 4 of this part, therein, Ro is the
28
external radius of equivalent spherical shell of ellipsoidal head, Ro=K1Do.
K1The coefficient determined by the ellipsoidal major to minor axis ratio (see Table 5-2).
Table 5-2 Values of Coefficient K1
Do
2.6 2.4 2.2 2.0 1.8 1.6 1.4 1.2 1.0
2ho
K1 1.18 1.08 0.99 0.90 0.81 0.73 0.65 0.57 0.50
Note: 1 The intermediate value is given by interpolation method;

2 It is normal ellipsoidal head where K1=0.9;
3 ho=hi+nh.
5.4 Dished Head
5.4.1 The internal radius of spherical face of dished head shall not be larger than the internal
diameter of head, which takes 0.9 times of internal diameter of head generally. The internal radius of
head outer corner shall not be less than 10% of internal diameter of head and shall not be less than 3
times of nominal thickness nh.
5.4.2 Dished head under internal pressure (with concave face under pressure)
The calculated thickness of head shall be calculated according to Formula (5-4) or Formula (5-5):
Mpc Ri
h = (5-4)
2[ ]t 0.5 pc
Mpc Ro
h = (5-5)
2[ ] + (2M 0.5) pc
t
Where RiThe internal radius of spherical face part of dished head, mm;
RoThe external radius of dished head, (Ro=Ri+nh), mm;
1 Ri
MThe shape factor of dished head, M = 3 + , its values are listed in Table 5-3;

4 r
rThe internal radius of corner at transition section of dished head, mm.
Table 5-3 Values of Coefficient M
Ri
1.0 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.0 2.25 2.50 2.75
r
M 1.00 1.03 1.06 1.08 1.10 1.13 1.15 1.17
Ri
3.0 3.25 3.50 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0
r
M 1.18 1.20 1.22 1.25 1.28 1.31 1.34 1.35
Ri
6.5 7.0 7.5 8.0 8.5 9.0 9.5 10.0
r
M 1.39 1.41 1.44 1.46 1.48 1.50 1.52 1.54
29
As for dished head where Ri/r5.5, its effective thickness shall not be less than 0.15% of internal
diameter of head; as for other dished heads, the effective thickness shall not be less than 0.30% of
internal diameter of head. Where the elastic instability under the internal pressure is considered when
determining the head thickness, the effective thickness may not be limited by the above requirements.
The maximum allowable operating pressure of the dished head shall be calculated according to
Formula (5-6):
2[ ]t eh
[ pw ] = (5-6)
MRi + 0.5 eh
5.4.3 Dished head under external pressure (with convex face under pressure)
The thickness calculation for dished head with convex surface under pressure shall adopt the
design method of external pressure spherical shell stated in Chapter 4 in this part, therein, Ro is the
external radius of spherical face part of dished head.
5.5 Spherical Cap Head
5.5.1 A spherical cap head may be used as an end head, it also may be used as a middle head
between two independent compression chambers in a vessel, and the structural style hereof is as
shown in Figure 5-4.
Note 1: In the Figure, RiThe internal radius of spherical cap head, mm;
Note 2: T joint which connects the head and cylinder shall adopt full penetration structure.
Figure 5-4 Spherical Cap Head
5.5.2 Calculated thickness of spherical cap head
When it is under internal pressure (with concave face under pressure), it (h) shall be calculated
as the internal pressure spherical shell stated in Chapter 3; when it is under external pressure (with
convex surface under pressure), it shall be calculated as the external pressure spherical shell stated in
Chapter 4. As for middle head, the harshest pressure combination operating condition at both sides of
the head shall be considered. Where it is able to guarantee that the pressure at both sides of head will
act simultaneously in any case, it may be calculated as according to the pressure difference at both
sides of head.
5.5.3 Thickness of reinforcing section of spherical cap end head

30
The calculated thickness of reinforcing section of head shall be calculated according to Formula
(5-7):
r=Q (5-7)
Where The calculated thickness of cylinder, it shall be calculated according to Formula (3-1);
QThe coefficient, adopted from Figure 5-5.
Figure 5-5 Q Value Diagram of Spherical Cap Head
Where the convex surface is under pressure, the thickness of the head in reinforcing section shall
simultaneously not less than that of the spherical shell determined according to 5.5.2 (i.e. according to
the calculation for the spherical shell under external pressure of Chapter 4).
Where 2/Di<0.002, the thickness of reinforcing section shall be calculated according to 5.5.5.
If the calculated thickness of cylinder is less than the reinforcing section thickness of spherical
cap head, then the transition juncture for reinforcing section shall be set at the cylinder end. Generally,
the calculated thickness of reinforcing section of cylinder adopts the calculated thickness of reinforcing
section of head, the length of reinforcing section of head and the length of reinforcing section of cylinder
all shall not be less than 2 Di r .
31
5.5.4 Thickness of reinforcing section of spherical cap middle head
The harshest pressure combination operating condition at both sides of head shall be considered
when calculating the thickness of reinforcing section of spherical cap middle head. The calculated
thickness shall be determined according to Formula (5-7). The harshest pressure combination operating
condition makes the concave surface be under pressure at one side, and the Q value shall be adopted
by looking up Figure 5-6. Under the harshest pressure combination operating condition, it is only
considered that the convex surface of head is under the pressure, Q value shall be adopted from Figure
5-7 and still shall not be less than the thickness determined by 5.5.2. (i.e. calculating according to the
spherical shell under external pressure of Chapter 4).
Where 2/Di<0.002, the thickness of the reinforcing section shall be calculated according to
5.5.5.
If the calculated thickness of cylinder is less than the reinforcing section thickness of spherical
cap middle head, then the transition juncture for reinforcing section of cylinder shall be set at the
juncture, as shown in Figure 5-4. Generally, the calculated thickness of reinforcing section of cylinder
adopts the calculated thickness of reinforcing section of head, the length of reinforcing section of head
and the length of reinforcing section of cylinder at both sides all shall not be less than 2 Di r .
5.5.5 Calculation of the thickness for reinforcing section where 2/Di<0.002
As for the spherical cap end heads and spherical cap middle heads require for reinforcement,
where is calculated according to Formula (3-1) and 2/Di<0.002, the thickness for the reinforcing
section shall be calculated according to the following procedure:
a) Set =0.001Di;
b) Look for value Q respectively in Figure 5-5 (or Figure 5-6 and Figure 5-7) with pc/([]t)=
0.002;
c) Calculate the reinforcing section thickness according to Formula (5-7) (namely r=Q) with
the and Q acquired from a) and b).
5.6 Conical Head
5.6.1 General requirements
5.6.1.1 The provisions in this section are only applicable to axisymmetric conical heads with or
without edgefold (where the half vertex angle of conical shell: 60), the conical head may have the
following kinds of type:
a) Conical shell with single thickness, as shown in Figure 5-8;
b) Combination of multi-section conical shells with dissimilar thickness at the same half vertex
angle;
c) Conical shell with edgefold (circular ring shell) and straight section (cylinder shell) at large
end or small end, as shown in Figure 5-9 and Figure 5-10.
d) Conical shell without edgefold and with reinforcing section at large end or small end, as
shown in Figure 5-12 and Figure 5-14;
32
pc/[]t(2/Di)
Figure 5-6 Q Value Diagram for Spherical Cap Shell Middle Head
pc/[]t(2/Di)
Figure 5-7 Q Value Diagram for Spherical Cap Shell Middle Head
33
Figure 5-8 Figure 5-9 Figure 5-10
Conical Shell Without Edgefold Conical Shell with Edgefold at Large End Conical Shell with Edgefold
5.6.1.2 Structure requirements
The structure design requirement of conical head shall comply with Table 5-4:
Table 5-4 Arrangement Requirement of the Edgefold for Conical Head
Half vertex angle of conical head 30 45 60 >60
Permissible to be Shall be with edgefold

Large end of the conical shell
without edgefold (r10%DiL and 3r) According to flat cover
Shall be with edgefold (or stress analysis)

Small end of the conical shell Permissible to be without edgefold
(rs5%Dis and 3r)
5.6.1.3 Thickness of the conical shell
If the large end of the conical shell or both of the large end and small end of the conical are
provided with reinforcing section or transition section, then the thickness of each parts from the
conical head shall be determined according to 5.6.3, 5.6.4 and 5.6.5 respectively. If one type of
thickness composition is considered only, then the maximum thickness of the parts mentioned above
shall be taken as the thickness of the conical head.
In any case, the thickness of the transition section or the reinforcing section shall not be less than
that of the conical shell which it connects and shall not be less than 0.3% of the internal diameter of
the cylinder.
The conical head subjected to external pressure shall meet the strength requirement under design
conditions at first.
5.6.1.4 The connection of conical shell and cylinder shall adopt full penetration structure.
5.6.2 Symbols
AThe calculated gauge factor for external pressure;
AeLThe effective strengthening cross sectional area of juncture of conical shell large end
and cylinder when calculating external pressure, mm2;
AeSThe effective strengthening cross sectional area of juncture of conical shell small end
and cylinder when calculating external pressure, mm2;
34
ArLThe cross sectional area needs to be reinforced at large end of conical shell, mm2;
ArsThe cross sectional area needs to be reinforced at small end of conical shell, mm2;
AsThe cross sectional area of reinforcing ring, mm2;
ATThe equivalent cross sectional area of cylinder, conical shell and reinforcing ring; for
large end is ATL, see Formula (5-26) and for small end is ATs, see Formula, mm2;
BThe calculated stress coefficient for external pressure, MPa;
CThe additional thickness (according to GB 150.1), mm;
DcThe calculated internal diameter of conical shell, mm;
DiLThe internal diameter at large end of conical shell straight section, mm;
DisThe internal diameter at small end of conical shell straight section, mm;
DLThe external diameter at large end of conical shell considered during calculation for
external pressure, (see Figure 5-16), mm;
DoLThe external diameter at large end of conical shell straight section, mm;
DosThe external diameter at small end of conical shell straight section, mm;
DsThe external diameter at small end of conical shell considered during calculation for
external pressure, (see Figure 5-16), mm;
Ec, Er, EsThe elasticity modulus of materials at the design temperature, the subscripts c, r and s
represent the one for conical shell, reinforcing ring and cylinder respectively, MPa;
f1The axial force per unit of peripheral length generated at the large end of the conical
shell due to external load except pressure load, N/mm;
f2The axial force per unit of peripheral length generated at the small end of the conical
shell due to external load except pressure load, N/mm;
IThe inertia moment required by cylinder-conical shell or reinforcing ring-cylinder-

conical shell combined segments, mm4;
IsThe inertia moment of the effective cross section of cylinder-conical shell or reinforcing
ring-cylinder-conical shell combined segments to the centroidal axis paralleled to shell
axis versus, mm4;
kThe coefficient, see Figure (5-13);
LcThe length between two reinforcing rings on the conical shell, measured along the
conical shell surface, mm;
LeThe equivalent length of conical shell, mm;
LLThe calculated length of the cylinder which connects the large end of conical shell, mm;
LsmThe calculated length of the cylinder which connects the small end of conical shell, mm;
35
LxThe axial length of conical shell section (see Figure 5-16), mm;
1
QLThe algebraic sum of pc DL and f1, N/mm;
4
1
QsThe algebraic sum of pc Ds and f2, N/mm;
4
RThe middle plane radius of cylinder, mm;
RLThe middle plane radius of at large end of conical shell straight section, mm;
RoLThe external radius at large end of conical shell straight section, mm;
RosThe external radius at small end of conical shell straight section, mm;
RsThe middle plane radius at small end of conical shell straight section, mm;
rThe corner radius at large end of transition section of conical shell with edgefold (see
Figure 5-10), mm;
rsThe corner radius at small end of transition section of conical shell with edgefold (see
Figure 5-10), mm;
The half vertex angle of conical shell, ();
The index value that the juncture of large end of conical shell, where , it is not
necessary to reinforce this juncture (see Table 5-5 and Table 5-8), ();
cThe calculated thickness of conical shell, mm;
ecThe effective thickness of equivalent of conical shell, mm;
ncThe nominal thickness of conical shell, mm;
[ ]ct The allowable stress of materials used for conical shell at design temperature (according
to GB 150.2), MPa;
[ ]rt The allowable stress of materials used for reinforcing ring at design temperature
(according to GB 150.2), MPa;
[ ]st The allowable stress of materials used for cylinder at design temperature (according to
GB 150.2), MPa;
The welding joint coefficient (according to GB 150.1).
5.6.3 Conical shell thickness under internal pressure
The calculated thickness of the conical shell shall be calculated according to Formula (5-8):
pc Dc 1
c = (5-8)
2[ ]c pc cos
t
If the conical shell comprises of several conical shell segments of dissimilar thickness and the
same half vertex angle, then Dc in the formula is the internal diameter at the large end of each conical
36
shell segment respectively.
5.6.4 Conical shell without edgefold under internal pressure
5.6.4.1 Thickness for the large end of conical shell without edgefold under internal pressure
When the large end of the conical shell without edgefold connects the cylinder, the thickness of
the large end of the conical shell at the juncture shall be determined according to the following procedures:
It shall be determined that if it is necessary to reinforce at the juncture according to Figure 5-11;
No tallowed
No reinforcement
Increass thickness
Maximum angle,
Note: The curve is drawn according to the maximum stress strength (mainly buckling stress), and the controlling value hereof is 3[]t.
Figure 5-11 Determination on Reinforcement at Juncture of Large End of Conical Shell
If there is no reinforcement requirement, the thickness of large end of conical shell shall be
determined according to Formula (5-8);
If it needs reinforcement by increasing thickness, then the reinforcing section shall be set between
the conical shell and cylinder, the reinforcing section of the conical shell and the reinforcing section
of the cylinder shall have the same thickness, the procedures are as follows:
a) The thickness of the cylinder which connects the conical shell shall be calculated according
to Formula (3-1), Di in the formula shall adopt the internal diameter DiL of large end of the conical
shell;
b) Calculate according to Formula (5-9):
r=Q1 (5-9)
Where Q1The value-add coefficient of the stress at large end, adopted from Figure 5-12.
Where /RL<0.002, the thickness of reinforcing section shall be determined according to 5.6.4.3.
37
In any case, the thickness of the reinforcing section shall not be less than the thickness of the
conical shell that it connects. The length L1 of the reinforcing section of conical shell shall not be less
2 DiL r
than ; the length L of the reinforcing section of cylinder shall not be less than 2 DiL r .
cos
5.6.4.2 Thickness for the small end of conical shell without edgefold under internal pressure
When the small end of the conical shell without edgefold connects the cylinder, the thickness of
the small end of the conical shell at the juncture shall be determined according to the following
procedures:
It shall be determined that if it is necessary to reinforce at the juncture according to Figure 5-13;
If there is no reinforcement requirement, the thickness of small end of conical shell shall be
calculated according to Formula (5-8);
pc[]t=/RL
Note: The curve is drawn according to the maximum equivalent stress, and the controlling value is 3[]t.
Figure 5-12 Q1 Value of Juncture at Large End of Conical Shell
If it needs reinforcement by increasing thickness, then the reinforcing section shall be set between
the conical shell and cylinder, the reinforcing section of the conical shell and the reinforcing section
of the cylinder shall have the same thickness, the procedures are as follows:
a) The thickness of the cylinder which connects the conical shell shall be calculated according
to Formula (3-1), Di in the formula shall adopt the internal diameter Dis of small end of the conical shell;
38
b) Calculate according to Formula (5-10):
r=Q2 (5-10)
Where Q2The value-add coefficient of the stress at small end, adopted from Figure 5-14.
Where /Rs<0.002, the thickness of reinforcing section shall be determined according to 5.6.4.3.
In any case, the thickness of the reinforcing section shall not be less than the thickness of the
conical shell that it connects. The length L1 of the reinforcing section of the conical shell shall not be less
2 Dis r
than ; the length L of the reinforcing section of the cylinder shall not be less than 2 Dis r .
cos
5.6.4.3 Calculation for the reinforcing section of conical shell without edgefold where /R<0.002.
As for the conical shell without edgefold that requires reinforcement, where /RL<0.002 or /Rs<
0.002, when calculating the reinforcing section of the conical shell without edgefold, the thickness of
the reinforcing section at large end and small end shall be calculated according to Formula (5-11) or
Formula (5-12) respectively:
r=0.001Q1DiL (5-11)
r=0.001Q2Dis (5-12)
Q1 and Q2 in the above two formulae are obtained by respectively looking up Figure 5-12 and
Figure 5-14 based on pc/[]t=0.002.
No reinforcement
Increass thickness
Maximum angle,
Note: The curve is drawn according to the equivalent local membrane stress (calculated from average circumferential tensile stress
and average radial compressive stress) of the juncture, and the controlling value is 1.1[]t.
Figure 5-13 Determination on Reinforcement at Juncture of Small End of Conical Shell

39
pc/[]t=/Rs
Figure 5-14 Q2 Value of Juncture at Small End of Conical Shell
5.6.4.4 The reinforcement design at the juncture between the conical shell without edgefold and
cylinder in a combined action of internal pressure and axial load
The calculation method of this section is applicable to the conical shell without edgefold with a
half vertex angle 30 in a combined action of internal pressure and other axial loads (such as
eccentric weight, wind load, earthquake load, etc.) for the calculation of structural stress checking at
the juncture of cylinder.
When designing the reinforcement structure at the juncture of conical shell and cylinder, the
conical shell thickness calculated according to 5.6.3 and 5.6.4.1~5.6.4.3 shall be respectively met at
first. The impacts of the different materials between reinforcing ring, conical shell and cylinder on the
reinforcement calculation shall be considered by adopting coefficient k detailed in Formula (5-13).
1 Where it is not required to add reinforcement area

k = (5-13)
y /([ ] t
E
r r ) and not less than 1 Where it is required to add reinforcem ent area
Where yThe connection coefficient of conical shell and cylinder,
40
The reinforcing ring is set on the cylinder: y= [ ]st Es;
The reinforcing ring is set on the conical shell: y= [ ]ct Ec.
The reinforcement design for internal pressure in this section is only applicable to where QL and
Qs are tensile load (namely that both their values are positive); simultaneously, f1 and f2 are positive
where there is axial tension, otherwise native.
5.6.4.4.1 Reinforcement design at juncture between large end of conical shell and cylinder
If value , which is obtained from Table 5-5 with the ratio of pc/ [ ]st , is less than the half vertex
angle of conical shell , the reinforcement design shall be carried out (the intermediate value is given
by interpolation method).
The minimum area of reinforcement required shall be determined according to Formula (5-14).
kQL DiL tan

ArL = 1 (5-14)
2[ ]st
Where =1.0.
The effective sectional area of the reinforcement for the juncture between the large end of conical
shell and cylinder shall be calculated according to Formula (5-15). If it is provided with reinforcing
ring, its sectional area shall also be counted in.
DiL nc
AeL = 0.71( n C ) DiL n + 0.71( nc c C ) (5-15)
cos
Checking condition: AeLArL.
Table 5-5 Value at Juncture Between Conical Shell End and Cylinder Where 30
pc/[]ts 0.002 0.003 0.004 0.005 0.006 0.007 0.008 0.009
/() 11 13.5 16 18 19.5 21.5 23 24.5

Large end
pc/[]ts 0.010 0.012 0.013
/() 26 29 30
t
pc/[]
s 0.002 0.005 0.010 0.02 0.04 0.08 0.1 0.125
Small end
/() 4 6 9 12.5 17.5 24 27 30
Note: As for greater value of pc/[] , =30.

t
s
All sections, which can be used for reinforcement, on the conical shell and cylinder shall be
within DiL n / 2 from the juncture of the conical shell and cylinder, and the centroid of the
reinforcement area is required to be within 0.25 DiL n / 2 from the juncture.
5.6.4.4.2 Reinforcement design of juncture between small end of conical shell and cylinder
Use the ratio pc/ [ ]st to adopt value from Table 5-5, if value is less than the half vertex
angle of conical shell , then the reinforcement design shall be conducted (the intermediate value is
given by interpolation method).
41
The minimum value of the reinforcement area shall be determined according to Formula (5-16):
kQs Dis tan

Ars = 1 (5-16)
2[ ]st
The effective reinforcing cross sectional area of the juncture between the small end of conical
shell and cylinder may be calculated according to Formula (5-17), this value may be counted in the
section of the reinforcing ring.
Dis nc
Aes = 0.55( n C ) Dis n + 0.55( nc c C ) (5-17)
cos
Checking condition: AesArs.
All section on the conical shell and cylinder that used for reinforcement must be within the range
of Dis n / 2 away from the juncture of the conical shell and cylinder, and the centroid of the
reinforcement area must be within the range of 0.25 Dis n / 2 .
5.6.5 Conical shell with edgefold under internal pressure
5.6.5.1 Thickness of large end of the conical shell with edgefold under internal pressure
The thickness of large end of the conical shell with edgefold shall be calculated according to
Formula (5-18) and Formula (5-19), the larger value shall be taken:
a) Thickness of transition section:
Kpc DiL
r = (5-18)
2[ ]ct 0.5 pc
Where KThe coefficient, according to Table 5-6.
Table 5-6 Value of Coefficient K
r/DiL

0.10 0.15 0.20 0.30 0.40 0.50
10 0.664 4 0.611 1 0.578 9 0.540 3 0.516 8
20 0.695 6 0.635 7 0.598 6 0.552 2 0.522 3
30 0.754 4 0.681 9 0.635 7 0.574 9 0.532 9
35 0.798 0 0.716 1 0.662 9 0.591 4 0.540 7
40 0.854 7 0.760 4 0.698 1 0.612 7 0.550 6 0.500 0
45 0.925 3 0.818 1 0.744 0 0.640 2 0.563 5
50 1.027 0 0.894 4 0.804 5 0.676 5 0.580 4
55 1.160 8 0.998 0 0.885 9 0.724 9 0.602 8
60 1.350 0 1.143 3 1.000 0 0.792 3 0.633 7
Note: The intermediate value is given by interpolation method.
b) Thickness of conical shell at the juncture which it connects the transition section:
42
fpc DiL
r = (5-19)
2[ ]ct 0.5 pc
2r
1 (1 cos )
DiL
Where fThe coefficient, f = , its values are listed in Table 5-7.
2 cos
Table 5-7 Value of Coefficient f
r/DiL

0.10 0.15 0.20 0.30 0.40 0.50
10 0.506 2 0.505 5 0.504 7 0.503 2 0.501 7

20 0.525 7 0.522 5 0.519 3 0.512 8 0.506 4
30 0.561 9 0.554 2 0.546 5 0.531 0 0.515 5
35 0.588 3 0.577 3 0.566 3 0.544 2 0.522 1
40 0.622 2 0.606 9 0.591 6 0.561 1 0.530 5 0.500 0
45 0.665 7 0.645 0 0.624 3 0.582 8 0.541 4
50 0.722 3 0.694 5 0.666 8 0.611 2 0.555 6
55 0.797 3 0.760 2 0.723 0 0.648 6 0.574 3
60 0.900 0 0.850 0 0.800 0 0.700 0 0.600 0
Note: The intermediate value is given by interpolation method.
5.6.5.2 Thickness of small end of the conical shell with edgefold under internal pressure
Where the half vertex angle of the conical shell is 45, if the edgefold is required, then the
transition section thickness of the small end shall be calculated according to Formula (5-10), Q2 value
in the formula shall be adopted by looking up Figure 5-14.
Where the half vertex angle of the conical shell >45, if the edgefold is required, then the
transition section thickness of the small end still shall be calculated according to Formula (5-10),
however, Q2 value in the formula shall be adopted from Figure 5-15.
The reinforcing section thickness of the conical shell and cylinder that connect the transition
section shall be the same as the transition section thickness. The length L1 of the reinforcing section of
the conical shell shall not be less than Dis r / cos ; the length L of the reinforcing section of the
cylinder shall not be less than Dis r .
5.6.6 Conical shell under external pressure
5.6.6.1 If the conical shell is under external pressure action, then the calculated length of the conical
shell shall be calculated according to equivalent length Le:
a) The equivalent length of the conical shell without edgefold or the conical shell segment
between two adjacent reinforcing rings on the conical shell [see Figure 5-16 a) and b)] shall be
calculated according to Formula (5-20):
Lx D
Le = 1 + s (5-20)
2 DL
43
Reinforcing section
of conical shell
Transition section
Reinforcing section of
cylinder
pc/[]t=/Rs
Figure 5-15 Q2 Value of Connection of Transition Section in Small End Zone of Conical Shell
b) The equivalent length of the conical shell with edgefold at large end [see Figure 5-16 c)]
Lx D
Le = (r + r ) sin + 1 + s (5-21)
2 DL
c) The equivalent length of the conical shell with edgefold at small end [see Figure 5-16 d)]
Ds L D
Le = rs sin + x 1 + s (5-22)
DL 2 DL
d) The equivalent length of the conical shell with edgefold [see Figure 5-16 e)] shall be
44
Ds L D
Le = (r + r ) sin + rs sin + x 1 + s (5-23)
DL 2 DL
Figure 5-16 Equivalent Length of Conical Shell
5.6.6.2 Calculation of conical shell under external pressure

45
If the conical shell (see Figure 5-16) is under external pressure, then the required effective
thickness shall be determined according to the following methods and procedures:
a) Suppose that the nominal thickness of the conical shell is nc;
b) Calculate ec=(ncC)cos;
c) Conduct the external pressure checking and calculation according to those specified in 4.3,
replace L/Do with Le/DL, and replace Do/e with DL/ec;
d) The design external pressure pc in this section shall adopt positive value. The calculation
method of external pressure reinforcement is applicable only when QL and Qs are compressive loads,
namely, QL and Qs are positive values. Where f1 and f2 are axial compressive loads, they adopt positive
values, otherwise negative.
5.6.6.3 General requirement for external pressure reinforcement design of juncture between conical
shell and cylinder
The conical shell with half vertex angle 60 is under external pressure, its structure that connects
the cylinder shall be calculated according to 5.6.6.4 and 5.6.6.5 to determine that if the reinforcement
is required.
Generally, the reinforcing material of the juncture between conical shell and cylinder shall be the
same as shell material. If the allowable stress of reinforcing material is less than that of shell material,
then the reinforcement area shall be increased according to the ratio of the allowable stress of shell
material to that of reinforcing material. If the allowable stress of reinforcing material is larger than
that of shell material, then the reinforcement area required shall not be reduced.
The arrangement of reinforcing ring shall comply with 4.5.2.
5.6.6.4 Reinforcement design of juncture between large end of conical shell and cylinder
5.6.6.4.1 Area checking for the reinforcement at juncture between large end of conical shell (without
edgefold) and cylinder
Use the ratio of pc/ [ ]st to adopt value from Table 5-8, if value is less than the half vertex
angle of conical shell , then the reinforcement design shall be conducted (the intermediate value is
given by interpolation method).
kQL DoL tan 1 pc DoL 2QL

ArL = 1 (5-24)
2[ ]st 4 2 QL
Where kThe coefficient, which is the same as Formula (5-13).
The effective reinforcing cross sectional area of the juncture between the large end of conical
DoL nc
AeL = 0.55( n C ) DoL n + 0.55( nc C ) (5-25)
cos
46
Checking condition: AeLArL.
Table 5-8 Value at Juncture Between Large End of Conical Shell and Cylinder Where 60
pc/[]ts 0 0.002 0.005 0.01 0.02 0.04 0.08
/() 0 5 7 10 15 21 29
pc/[]ts 0.10 0.125 0.15 0.20 0.25 0.30 0.35
/() 33 37 40 47 52 57 60
Note: Where pc/[]ts>0.35, =60.
of DL n / 2 away from the juncture of the conical shell and cylinder, and the centroid of the
reinforcement area must be within the range of 0.25 DL n / 2 away from the juncture.
5.6.6.4.2 Determination for the juncture between large end of conical shell and cylinder as supporting
line
a) Where the juncture between large end of conical shell and cylinder is not considered as one
supporting line, then the calculated length for external pressure shall be determined according to
Figure 4-1 c-2), otherwise Figure 4-1 b), e) and f);
b) Select the reinforced structure of the juncture between large end of conical shell and cylinder,
and determine the calculated length LL (see Figure 5-17) of cylinder under external pressure, which
connects to conical shell;
c) The inertia moment of the juncture between large end of conical shell and cylinder shall be
determined according to the following procedures:
1) Determination of external pressure stress coefficient B value
Determine the equivalent cross sectional area ATL according to the selected reinforced structure,
and then calculate the coefficient B according to Formula (5-26):
FL DL
B= (5-26)
ATL
1 1
Where ATL = LL ( n C ) + Lc ( nc C ) + As
2 2
( DL Ds ) 2
Lc = L2x
4
FL=pcM+f1 tan
DL tan LL D 2 Ds2
M = + + L
4 2 6 DL tan
2) Determination of external pressure stress coefficient A value
According to used materials, determine the curve diagram of corresponding external pressure
47
stress coefficient B by looking up Table 4-1, then obtain the A value based on the B value
according to the curve diagram of corresponding external pressure stress coefficient B; if B
value exceeds the maximum value of the lower curve at the design temperature, then take the
abscissa of the right endpoint of the lower curve of corresponding temperature as A value; if
B value is less than the minimum value of the lower curve at the design temperature, then
calculated the A value according to Formula (5-27):
A=1.5B/Er (5-27)
3) Determination of required inertia moment I
Calculate the required inertia moment I value of the combined section of the selected conical
shell-cylinder or conical shell-reinforcing ring-cylinder according to Formula (5-28):
ADL2 ATL
I= (5-28)
10.9
d) When determining the effective inertia moment Is of the set composite structure for the
juncture between large end of conical shell and cylinder, it shall be IsI. Otherwise, another composite
reinforced structure with larger inertia moment shall be selected for repeating above calculation until
Is meets the requirement.
The calculation of effective inertia moment Is may count in the shell of 0.55 DoL n at both
sides of connecting line between the cylinder and conical shell. If the effective width of shell at both
sides overlaps with that of adjacent reinforcing ring, then each side of the overlap section shall be
calculated by half respectively.
a) b)
Figure 5-17 Schematic Diagram of Calculated Length
5.6.6.5 Reinforcement design of juncture between the small end of conical shell and the cylinder
5.6.6.5.1 Area checking for the reinforcement at juncture between small end of conical shell (without
edgefold) and cylinder
kQs Dos tan

Ars = (5-29)
2[ ]st
Where =1.0.
48
The effective reinforcing cross sectional area of the juncture between the small end of conical
Dos nc
Aes = 0.55( n C ) Dos n + 0.55( nc c C ) (5-30)
cos
Checking condition: AesArs.
of Ds n / 2 away from the juncture of the conical shell and cylinder, and the centroid of the
reinforcement area must be within the range of 0.25 Ds n / 2 away from the juncture.
5.6.6.5.2 Determination for the juncture between small end of conical shell and cylinder as supporting
line
a) Where the juncture between small end of conical shell and cylinder is not considered as one
supporting line, then the calculated length for external pressure shall be determined according to
Figure 4-1 c-2), otherwise Figure 4-1 b), e) and f).
b) Select the reinforced structure of the juncture between small end of conical shell and cylinder,
and determine the calculated length Lsm (see Figure 5-17) of cylinder under external pressure, which
connects to conical shell.
c) The inertia moment of the juncture between small end of conical shell and cylinder shall be
determined according to the following procedures:
1) Determination of external pressure stress coefficient B value
Determine the equivalent cross sectional area ATs at the juncture between small end of
conical shell and cylinder according to the selected reinforced structure, and then calculate
the coefficient B according to Formula (5-31):
Fs Ds
B= (5-31)
ATs
1 1
Where ATs = Lsm ( n C ) + Lc ( nc C ) + As
2 2
Fs=pcN+f2 tan
Ds tan Lsm D 2 Ds2

N= + + L
4 2 12 Ds tan
2) Determination of external pressure stress coefficient A value
According to used materials, determine the curve diagram of corresponding external pressure
stress coefficient B from Table 4-1, then obtain A value from B value in the curve diagram of
corresponding external pressure stress coefficient B; if B value exceeds the maximum value
of the lower curve of design temperature, then the abscissa of the right endpoint of the lower
49
curve of corresponding temperature shall be taken as A value; if B value is less than the
minimum value of the lower curve of design temperature, then A value shall be calculated
according to Formula (5-27);
3) Determination of required inertia moment I
Calculate the required inertia moment I value of the combined section of the selected conical
shell-cylinder or conical shell-reinforcing ring-cylinder according to Formula (5-32):
ADs2 ATs
I= (5-32)
10.9
d) The effective inertia moment Is of the composite structure at the juncture between small end
of conical shell and cylinder shall be determined and shall meet IsI. Otherwise, another composite
reinforced structure with larger inertia moment shall be selected for repeating former calculation until
Is meets the requirement.
The calculation of effective inertia moment Is may count in the shell of 0.55 Dos n at both sides
of connecting line between the cylinder and conical shell. If the effective width of shell at both sides
overlaps with that of adjacent reinforcing ring, then each side of the overlap section shall be calculated
by half respectively.
5.6.6.6 The calculating block diagram of the external pressure on the conical shell which connects
the cylinder is detailed in Figure 5-18.
5.7 Eccentric Conical Shell
5.7.1 The eccentric conical shell involved in this article refers to non-axisymmetric conical shell
(see Figure 5-19) for connecting cylinder bodies that with two mutual parallel axis. Meanwhile, the
following requirements shall be met:
a) The spacing L of two cylinder body axis shall be less than or equal to 1/2 of the internal
diameter difference of the two cylinder bodies;
b) As for internal pressure, the large value 1 of the included angle between the eccentric
conical shell and cylinder body shall be less than or equal to 30; as for external pressure, 160.
5.7.2 Calculation of the thickness for eccentric conical shell under internal pressure
a) Adopt the larger value from the two included angles 1 and 2 between the eccentric conical
shell and cylinder body as the half vertex angle ;
b) Determine the thickness of the eccentric conical shell according to 5.6.3;
c) Determine the thickness of large end of the eccentric conical shell according to 5.6.4.1;
d) Determine the thickness of small end of the eccentric conical shell according to 5.6.4.2;
e) Adopt the larger value of above-mentioned b), c) and d) as the thickness of the eccentric
conical shell.
50
Determine the location of supporting line
Determine the calculated length according to

Figure 4.1
Determine the thickness of each segment ac

cording to the parameter of each segment
Whether there is any No

conial shells in the
segment considered
Yes
Whether there is any Yes Whether there is any Yes

edgefold at large end edgefold at small
of conial shell end of conial shell
No No
Reinforcement design of juncture between the large Reinforcement design of juncture between the small end
end of conical shell and the cylinder of conical shell and the cylinder
(5.6.6.3.1) (5.6.6.3.2)
Adopt from Table 5-8 according to Pc/[] s

t Calculate the cross sectional area that needs reinforcing Ars
No
Calculate the effective reinforced cross
Yes sectional area Aes
Calculate the cross sectional area that needs reinforcing ArL No

AcsArs Add Aes
Yes
Calculate the effective reinforced cross sectional

area AeL
Whether it is No
No considered as the
AeLArL Add AeL Yes supporting line
Yes No
Yes
No Whether Aes Yes
Whether AeL has changed
has changed Whether it is No
Yes considered as the No
No
supporting line
Whether there
is any
No Yes edgefold Yes
Whether there
is any edgefold
Yes Calculate the inertia moment I Is (5.6.6.4.2) Calculate the inertia moment I Is (5.6.6.5.2)
Adjust the No Adjust the

No
geometrical IsI geometrical IsI
parameters parameters
Yes Yes
Accomplish the design of juncture between the large end Accomplish the design of juncture between the small end
of conical shell and the cylinder of conical shell and the cylinder
Accomplish the design according to the calculation of conical shell under external pressure in 5.6.6.2 (or Chapter 4)
Figure 5-18 Calculating Block Diagram of External Pressure on Conical Shell Which Connects Cylinder
51
Figure 5-19 Eccentric Conical Shell
5.7.3 Calculation of the thickness for eccentric conical shell under external pressure
The determination of thickness of the eccentric conical shell under external pressure as well as
the external pressure reinforcement design of the juncture between the eccentric conical shell under
external pressure and the cylinder may refer to 5.6.6, the design shall be carried out by taking 1 and
2 respectively as the half vertex angle of the conical shell according to their requirements, and the
larger value is regarded as the thickness of the eccentric conical shell.
5.8 Reducer
5.8.1 When the conical shell with edgefold or the conical shell without edgefold is taken as reducer,
the reducer design shall be conducted according to corresponding requirements stated in 5.6.
5.8.2 If the reducer is in reverse curve form (see Figure 5-20), then the thickness of each part shall
be respectively determined according to 5.6 and the larger value shall be adopted as reducer thickness.
Figure 5-20 Reverse Curve Reducer
5.9 Flat-cover
5.9.1 The calculation formula of this article is applicable to the design of reinforced flat-cover,
under internal pressure or external pressure, with or without hole. The geometrical shape of flat-cover
includes: circular, elliptical, obround, rectangular and square. The connection type of the flat-cover
52
and cylinder and the structure thereof are detailed in Table 5-9 and Table 5-10. And the design method
detailed in Table 5-10 is induced on a basis of plastic analysis and is applicable to the full penetration
connection structure for head and cylinder.
5.9.2 Symbols
aThe minor axis length of the noncircular flat-cover, mm;
bThe major axis length of the noncircular flat-cover, mm;
DcThe calculated diameter of the flat-cover, mm;
KThe structural characteristic coefficient;
LThe perimeter of bolt center connecting line of noncircular flat-cover, mm;
rThe arc radius of the flat-cover transition area, mm;
LGThe radial distance from the bolt center to the action center line of gasket pressing force
(see the sketch in Table 5-9), mm;
WThe bolt design load at the pre-tightening state or operating state (according to Chapter 7),
N;
ZThe shape factor of noncircular flat-cover;
pThe calculated thickness of flat-cover, mm;
epThe effective thickness of flat-cover, mm;
[]tThe allowable stress of the flat-cover materials at the design temperature (according to GB
150.2), MPa.
5.9.3 Circular flat-cover thickness
The flat-cover thickness shall be calculated according to Formula (5-33):
Kpc
p = Dc (5-33)
[ ]t
As for the flat-cover stated in serial number 9 and 10 in Table 5-9, it shall be calculated respectively
by substituting K value at operating state and pre-tightening state into Formula (5-33), and the larger
value shall be adopted. At pre-tightening state, []t shall adopt the allowable stress at ambient temperature.
The flat-covers stated in serial number 11, 12, 13 and 14 in Table 5-10 should adopt forgings for
processing and fabrication. If rolled plates are adopted directly for processing and fabrication, then
additional requirement for lamellar-tearing-resistant property shall be put forward.
5.9.4 Noncircular flat-cover thickness
a) Flat-covers as shown in Table 5-9 with number of 2, 3, 4, 5 and 8 shall be calculated

according to Formula (5-34):
KZpc
p = a (5-34)
[ ]t
53
Where, Z=3.42.4a/b and Z2.5.
Table 5-9 Selection List of Flat-cover Coefficient K
Fixation method No. Schematic drawing Structural characteristic coefficient K Remarks
Applicable to circular
Tangent line
flat-cover only
Fixed as one with Weld center
cylinder or fixed 1 0.145 pc0.6MPa
by butt welding L Di e
Slope 1:3
r3ep
Circular flat-cover: 0.44m (m=/e), and

not less than 0.3;
2 f1.4e
Noncircular flat-cover: 0.44
3 not less than 0.3 fe
Applicable to
circular flat-cover
only
4 f0.7e

not less than 0.3
5 f1.4e
Locked-base-butt
6 0.44m (m=/e), and not less than 0.3 flat-cover only, and
weld
1e+3mm
54
Fixation method No. Schematic drawing Structural characteristic coefficient K Remarks
Locked-base-butt
7 0.5 flat-cover only, and
weld
1e+3mm
Circular flat-cover or noncircular

8 flat-cover
0.25
Bolted
Circular flat-cover:
connection 9
1.78WLG
At operating state, 0.3 +
pc Dc3
1.78WLG
At pre - tightening state,
pc Dc3
Noncircular flat-cover:
6WLG
At operating state, 0.3Z +
pc L 2
6WLG
At pre - tightening state,
10 pc L 2
Table 5-10 Selection List of Flat-cover Coefficient K
No. Schematic drawing Structural parameters requirements Coefficient K
Where e38mm, r10mm; where e>38mm, r0.25

11 See Figure 5-21
e and not exceeding 20mm
55
No. Schematic drawing Structural parameters requirements Coefficient K
Where e38mm, r10mm; where e>38mm, r0.25

12 See Figure 5-21
e and not exceeding 20mm
r3f
L 2 Dc e
13 Note: Adopt f as the effective thickness e of the

cylinder which connects the flat-cover when
checked in Figure 5-21
f2e
14
r3f
15
Requires fusion penetration joint with total section

16 See Figure 5-22
fe
17
56
/Ri
Figure 5-21 Structural Characteristic Coefficient of Flat Head
/Ri
Figure 5-22 Structural Characteristic Coefficient of Flat Head

57
b) Flat-covers as shown in Table 5-9 with number of 9 and 10 shall be calculated according to
Formula (5-35):
Kpc
p = a (5-35)
[ ]t
Note: At pre-tightening state, []t shall adopt the allowable stress at ambient temperature.
5.9.5 Thickness of reinforced circular flat-cove
The reinforced flat-cover thickness as shown in Figure 5-23 shall be calculated according to
Formula (5-35) and the flat-cover thickness value shall not be less than 6mm.
pc
p = 0.55d (5-36)
[ ]t
Where, the equivalent diameter d shall adopt the larger one between d1 and d2 as shown in Figure
5-23.
sin(180o / n)
d1 Dc (5-37)
1 + sin(180o / n)
Note: The rib plate number: n6; d1d2; L3 adopts the minimum spacing of adjacent axial rib plates.
Figure 5-23 Schematic Diagram of Reinforced Flat-cover Structure
The welding by both sides shall be adopted between the rib plate and flat-cover;
If the rib plate with rectangular section is adopted, then the ratio of height to thickness shall be
5~8, and the bending modulus W of the section (effective width of flat cover is detailed in Figure 5-32)
58
shall meet Formula (5-38):
pc Dc3
W 0.08 (5-38)
n[ ]rt
Where, []tr is the allowable stress of rib plate materials at design temperature, MPa.
5.10 Forged Reduced Heads
5.10.1 Scope and general requirements
The structure form of reduced heads is detailed in Figure 5-24, the straight section thickness shall
be determined according to Formula (3-1), however, the effective thickness shall not be less than the
effective thickness of the cylinder which it butts; generally, the straight section length l shall not be
less than 50mm. Generally, the rest dimensions may be determined according to structural requirements.
As for the heads of this form, the strength checking may be conducted according to the scope and
contents as shown in Figure 5-25.
Figure 5-24 Reduced Heads with Straight Flange Figure 5-25 Reduced Heads Without Straight Flange
5.10.2 Symbols
AThe longitudinal cross section area at one side of axis, mm2;
A=Ai
AiThe area of each subzone of longitudinal cross section at one side of axis, mm2;
AnThe area of longitudinal cross section of inner cavity, mm2;
AniThe area of each subzone of longitudinal cross section of inner cavity, mm2;
bThe effective sealing width of gasket (according to Chapter 7), mm;
DbThe diameter of bolt hole center circle, mm;
DGThe center circle diameter of gasket pressing force action, mm;
DiThe internal diameter of head, mm;
FThe gross axial force of hydrostatic pressure, N;
FDThe axial force caused by hydrostatic pressure applying to the internal diameter section of
flange, N;
59
FpThe required minimum gasket pressing force, N;
HThe head height that excluding the straight section, mm;
IThe inertia moment of longitudinal cross section, mm4;
IiThe inertia moment of each subzone of longitudinal cross section at one side of axis, mm4;
lThe straight side height of the head, mm;
MThe bending moment acted on longitudinal cross section, N mm;
mThe gasket factor (see Table 7-2);
pcThe calculating pressure (according to GB 150.1), MPa;
rThe arc radius of inner cavity of head, mm;
LcThe distance from the centroid of longitudinal cross section to axis YY, mm;
LciThe distance from the centroid of each subzone of longitudinal cross section to axis YY,
mm;
LiThe distance from the centroid of each subzone of longitudinal cross section at one side of
axis to the neutral axis YcYc, mm;
LnThe distance from the centroid of longitudinal cross section of the inner cavity to axis
YY, mm;
LoThe distance from the neutral axis YcYc of longitudinal cross section to the neutral axis
YnYn of longitudinal cross section of the inner cavity, mm;
WThe statical moment from the longitudinal cross section at one side of axis to axis YY,
mm3;
W=LciAi
ZThe section factor of longitudinal cross section, mm3;
eThe effective thickness of juncture between the head and cylinder, mm;
mThe bending stress of longitudinal cross section, MPa;
[]tThe allowable stress of materials at the design temperature (according to GB 150.2), MPa.
5.10.3 Calculation of bending moment
The bending moment acted on the longitudinal cross section shall be calculated according to
Formula (5-39):
1 1 2
M= e + Di FD Db DG F ( Db DG ) Fp pc An Lo (5-39)
6.28 3 3
Where FD=0.785 D12 pc
F=0.785 DG2 pc
60
Fp=6.28DGbmpc
Lo=LcLn
An=Ani
5.10.4 Calculation of section factor
H
a) Where Lc , the section factor of the longitudinal cross section shall be calculated according
2
to Formula (5-40):
I
Z= (5-40)
Lc
H
b) Where Lc < , the section factor of the longitudinal cross section shall be calculated according
2
to Formula (5-41):
I
Z= (5-41)
H Lc
Where I=2[Ii+( L2i Ai)]
W
Lc =
A
Some kind of common sectional properties are detailed in Table 5-11.
5.10.5 Calculation of bending stress checking
The bending stress checking shall be conducted according to Formula (5-42):
M
m = 0.8[ ]t (5-42)
Z
Table 5-11 Some Kind of Sectional Properties
Distance from neutral axis to

Section Sectional area Ai Inertia moment Ii
outermost section S
h bh3
bh
2 12
61
Distance from neutral axis to

Section Sectional area Ai Inertia moment Ii
outermost section S
(b1 + b)h (b1 + 2b)h (b12 + 4b1b + b 2 )h3

2 3(b1 + b) 36(b1 + b)
bh 2h bh3
2 3 36
(b=h=r) (b=h=r) (b=h=r)

2
0.214 6r 0.776 7r 0.007 5r4
(b=h=r)
(b=h=r) (b=h=r)
r 2
0.575 4r 0.055 2r4
4
5.11 Flanged Convex Head
5.11.1 Application scope
This article is applicable to the design of flanged convex head, and the head form is as shown in
Figure 5-26.
62
The weld edge No less than 2h and
The weld edge shall not less than 13mm
shall not enter into not enter into the
the corner zone corner zone
Corner radius Corner radius
Corner radius
Gasket
Gasket Gasket
Flat welding flange Integral flange
Preferential minimum size

Preferential FD action
minimum Full penetration structure point
size 2h
Gasket Centroid
Gasket
Figure 5-26 Flanged Convex Head
5.11.2 Symbols
DThe external diameter of flange, mm;
DbThe diameter of center hole in bolts, mm;
DGThe center circle diameter of gasket pressing force action, mm;
DiThe internal diameter of flange, mm;
FDThe axial component on the internal diameter of flange ring caused by pressure load of
head (FD=0.785 Di2 pc), N;
FrThe radial component on the internal diameter of flange ring caused by pressure load of
head (see Table 5-12), N;
MoThe gross moment, N mm;
RiThe internal radius of spherical face part of the head, mm;
LDThe radial distance from the bolt center to FD, mm;
LrThe moment arm of force of Fr to the centroid of the cross section of flange ring, mm;
1The included angle between the middle plane tangent line of the spherical shell at the
head edge and the flange ring diameter (see Table 5-12), ();
efThe effective thickness of flange, mm;
fThe calculated thickness of flange, mm.

63
ehThe effective thickness of head, mm;
hThe calculated thickness of head, mm;
nhThe nominal thickness of head, mm.
5.11.3 Flanged convex head under internal pressure
Unless otherwise specified, the gross moment Mo for head of which the concave surface is under
pressure is detailed in 7.5.3.
5.11.3.1 Calculation of head structure as shown in Figure 5-26 a)
The calculated thickness of head h shall be calculated according to 5.3.2 or 5.4.2; the flange
design shall be conducted according to Chapter 7.
5.11.3.2 Calculation of head structure as shown in Figure 5-26 b)
a) The calculated thickness of the head shall be calculated according to Formula (5-43):
5 pc Ri
h = (5-43)
6[ ]t
b) The calculated thickness of flange f shall be calculated according to Formula (5-50) or

Formula (5-45):
As for narrow face flange
M o Do + Di
f = (5-44)
[ ]ft Di Do Di
Where Mo shall be calculated according to 7.5.3.
As for wide face flange
pc Di ( Do + Di )( Db Di )
f = 0 .6 (5-45)
[ ]ft Do Di
5.11.3.3 Calculation of head structure as shown in Figure 5-26 c)
a) The calculated thickness of the head shall be calculated according to Formula (5-43);
b) The calculated thickness of narrow face flange with circular bolt hole shall be calculated
according to Formula (5-46) in operating state and pre-tightening state respectively and the larger
value shall be adopted:
1.875M o ( Db + Di )
f = Q + (5-46)
[ ]ft Di (7 Db 5 Di )
At operating state, Q shall be calculated according to Formula (5-47), Mo adopt Mp, calculated
64
pc Ri Db + Di
Q= (5-47)
4[ ]ft b
7 D 5 Di
At pre-tightening state, Q=0, M0 adopts Ma [ ]ft /[]f, therein, Ma shall be calculated according to
Formula (7-11);
c) The calculated thickness of the narrow face flange of groove shape bolt hole shall be calculated
according to Formula (5-48) according to the operating state and pre-tightening state respectively, and
the larger value shall be taken:
1.875M o ( Db + Di )
f = Q + (5-48)
[ ]ft Di (3Db Di )
At operating state, Q shall be calculated according to Formula (5-49), Mo adopt Mp, calculated
pc Ri Db + Di
Q= (5-49)
4[ ]ft 3Db Di
At pre-tightening state, Q=0, Mo adopts Ma [ ]ft /[]f, Ma shall be calculated according to Formula
(7-11);
d) The calculated thickness of wide face flange with circular bolt hole shall be calculated
3Di Q( Db Di )
f = Q + Q2 + (5-50)
Ri
Q value shall be calculated according to Formula (5-47);
e) The calculated thickness of wide face flange with slotted bolt hole shall be calculated
according to Formula (5-50), therein, Q value shall be calculated according to Formula (5-49);
f) In any case, the flange thickness shall not be less than the head thickness.
5.11.3.4 Calculation of head structure as shown in Figure 5-26 d)
a) The head thickness shall be calculated according to Formula (5-43);
b) The flange stress shall be checked according to those specified in Table 5-12.
5.11.4 Flanged convex head under external pressure (with convex face under pressure)
a) The head thickness shall be calculated according to 4.4;
b) Unless otherwise specified, the gross moment shall be determined according to 7.5.4; as for
the flange moment calculation of head structure as shown in Figure 5-26 d), Mp=FD(LDLG)+FT(LT
LG)FrLr; thereinto, the calculation for Lr is the same as detailed in Table 5-12.
c) As for all types as shown in Figure 5-26, the flange in Figure 5-26 a) shall be calculated
65
according to Chapter 7, the thickness of other flanges shall be calculated according to Formula (5-44),
Formula (5-45), Formula (5-46), Formula (5-48) and Formula (5-50) respectively.
Table 5-12 Calculation Table of Flange of Flanged Spherical Head Under Internal Pressure without Edgefold
Design conditions Gasket and bolt calculation
Calculating pressure pc= MPa Materials N= mm y= MPa
Gasket External diameterinternal diameter

Design temperature t= b= mm m=
thickness
Materials Effective thickness of flange assumed ef= mm Effective thickness of head eh= mm
Flange []f= MPa F=0.785D2Gpc= N Fp=6.28DGbmpc= N

Allowable stress
[]tf= MPa Wa=3.14bDGy= N F+Fp= N
Materials Bolt diameter dB= mm Bolt quantity n=
Bolt []b= MPa Am1=(F+Fp)/[]tb= mm2 Am2=Wa/[]b= mm2

Allowable stress
[]tb= MPa Am=max{Am1, Am2}= mm2 Ab= mm2
0.5 Di Assumed l= mm (l is detailed in the

1 = arcsin = ()
W=0.5(Am+Ab)[]b= N
Ri + 0.5 ch Figure)
Pre-tightening Load-carrying of flange Arm of force Moment
state FG=W= N LG=0.5(DbDG)= mm Ma=FGLG= N mm
FD=0.785D2i pc= N LD=0.5(DbDi)= mm MD=FDLD= N mm
FG=Fp= N LG=0.5(DbDG)= mm MG=FGLG= N mm
Operating Fr=F-FD= N LT=0.5(LD+LG)= mm MT=FTLT= N mm

state
ef eh
Fr=FDcot1= N Lr = l = mm Mr=FrLr= N mm
2 2 cos 1
Gross moment of flange in operational conditions Mp=MD+MG+MTMr= N mm
M a Do + Di M p Do + Di pc Di 4 Ri2 Di2
Ja = = mm
2
Jp = = mm
2
L= = mm
[ ]f Di Do Di [ ]ft Di Do Di 8[ ]ft ( Do Di )
Flange thickness
FD action point
It is assumed that the effective thickness of flange
efmax{fa, fp} and ef2eh, or else ef shall be
reassumed until the requirement is met.
Centroid
fa = J a = mm
fp = L + J p + L2 = mm
Note: The adoption of the symbol and its value in this table that are not listed in the symbol explanation of this Section shall be in
accordance with Chapter 7.
66
5.12 Stay Structure
5.12.1 Scope
This article is applicable to the design of the convex head, flat head (flat plate) and cylinder body
that are supported by bars and rods, tubes and pipes or plates (hereinafter referred to as stay). The
stay structure includes the welded and non-welded structures. The common structural types are as
shown in Table 5-13.
5.12.2 Symbols
aThe minimum section area required by one single stay, mm;
dThe diameter of tie rod, mm;
dcThe equivalent circle diameter in rod strip, mm;
KThe coefficient, selected according to those specified in Table 5-13, determined by connection
method of stay;
LThe spacing of stay, mm;
WThe axial load borne by one single stay, N;
pThe calculated thickness of plate, mm;
epThe nominal thickness of plate, mm;
[ ]gt The allowable stress of stay materials at design temperature, MPa;
[ ]pt The allowable stress of supported plate materials at design temperature, MPa.
5.12.3 Calculation of thickness of plate under stay
The calculated thickness shall be calculated according to Formula (5-51):
pc
p = L (5-51)
[ ]pt K
When designing stay for jacketed vessels, the wall thickness of the jacket and vessel still needs
considering corresponding calculation requirement of internal and external pressure.
As for the flat head which adopt non-welded stay structure, its thickness must not be less than
8mm.
5.12.3.1 L and K value when arranging regular stay
As shown in Figure 5-27, when arranging regular stay, the spacing of stay L shall adopt the
maximum value of the spacing in horizontal direction L1, spacing in vertical direction L2 and spacing
in inclined direction L3. The stay constant K shall be valued according to those specified in Table
5-13.
5.12.3.2 L and K value when arranging irregular stay
As shown in Figure 5-28, when arranging irregular stay, L and K shall be adopted according to
the following methods respectively:
67
Figure 5-27 Regular Stay Arrangement
Table 5-13 Typical Stay Structure Types and Parameters
No. Structural type K Applicable conditions
The design pressure of jacket: p1.6MPa;

The plate thickness of jacket: 12mm;
1 2.2
The fillet weld root is of complete fusion and the weld leg
size shall not be less than the wall thickness of jacket
It is applicable to welded rod or plate stay, and the plate

2 2.2 thickness p30mm; the axial shear area of fillet weld shall
not be less than 1.4 times of cross sectional area of tie rod
It shall be in complete penetration.
The axial shear area of fillet weld shall not be less than 1.4
3 2.0
times of cross sectional area of tie rod
The sealing material or coating may be considered to add

between the contact surfaces of the wall plate, gasket, nut and
tie rod. This is applicable to low-voltage situation where the
leakage may happen
3.2 As for screw thread structure stay through the flat head,
the internal and external side of the flat head all have nuts and
4
gasket, and the gasket thickness shall not be less than 6mm.
The external diameter of the gasket shall not be less than 2.5
times of the diameter of bolt
Nuts are set at both the internal side and external side,
2.8 however, the washers are set only at the external (the rest
conditions as above)
68
a) Adopt the diameter of the maximum equivalent circle without internal stay that passing
through 3 supporting points as dc, then the spacing of the support is L= d c 2 ;
b) Coefficient K shall be valued according to those specified in Table 5-14, and the supporting
point type according to the supporting point of the maximum equivalent circle passed through; if one
equivalent circle has different supporting point types, then the average value K shall be adopted.
Figure 5-28 Irregular Support Arrangement
Table 5-14 Coefficient K Relevant with Supporting Point Type
Supporting point type K
Starting point of supporting point that transited at the head arc 3.2
Fixed line outside the pipe plate 3.2
Center line of tube bank 2.0
Tubular support 2.6
Other supporting points According to Table 5-13
5.12.4 Supporting load W of stay
a) Supporting load of plate without opening: the area enclosed by the midnormal of the
connecting line of the tie rod and its adjacent support center shall be the support area of this tie rod,
the calculating pressure load that it is under shall be the supporting load subjected by this tie rod;
b) Supporting load of plate with openings: the support area of a stick of supporting tube (rod)
subtracts the total area of tube holes in this area, the calculating pressure load on this area shall be the
supporting load bear by this tubular stay.
5.12.5 Section area required by one single stay
1.1W
a= (5-52)
[ ]gt
5.12.6 Arrangement of stay
a) When the angle joint is adopted for arranging inclined stay, the weld sectional area of
welding joints and the weld sectional area of the angle joint that measured in the direction parallel to
cylinder axis shall not be less than 1.4 times of the minimum sectional area required by stay.
69
When selecting inclined stay structure, the angle joint shall not be adopted in the concave surface
of the head.
b) The spacing of stay is generally not 30 times greater than the diameter of tie rod.
5.13 Welding Structure
The welding structure of head and cylinder shall not only meet the above-mentioned requirements
but also not adopt the structure shown as Figure 5-29:
Not welded
Figure 5-29 Impermissible Welding Structure
6 Openings and Reinforcements
6.1 Scope and General Requirements
Provisions of this chapter are applicable to calculation of the openings and their reinforcements
of the vessel body, including the equal-area method and analysis method.
6.1.1 Application scope of equal-area method
Equal-area method is applicable to the circular, elliptical or obround openings. When elliptical or
obround opening is set in the shell, the ratio of the major diameter of this opening to its minor diameter
shall not be larger than 2.0. Application scope of this method:
a) When the internal diameter of cylinder meets Di1500mm, then the maximum diameter of
opening shall be dopDi/2 and dop520mm; when the internal diameter of cylinder meets Di>1500mm,
then the maximum diameter of opening shall be dopDi/3 and dop1000mm;
b) The maximum permissible diameter of the opening in convex head or spherical shell shall
meet dopDi/2;
c) The maximum diameter of opening in conical head shall meet dopDi/3, and Di is the internal
diameter of conical shell at the center of this opening.
Note: The maximum opening diameter dop means the long axis size in relation to the elliptical or obround opening.
6.1.2 Application scope of analysis method
This calculation method is the stress analysis method obtained based on the elastic thin shell
theory, and is used for the opening reinforcement design of such cylinder having radial connection
pipe under the action of internal pressure, and its application scope is as follows:
d0.9D and max[0.5, d/D]et/e2
The applicable scope comparison of opening rate between this method and equal-area method is
detailed in Figure 6-1.
70
Application scope of analysis method
Application scope of equal-area method
Figure 6-1 Application Scope of the Analysis Method and Equal-area Method for Opening Reinforcement of
Cylinder
6.1.3 The maximum opening diameter without additional reinforcement
If the opening of the shell meets all the following requirements, reinforcement may be neglected:
a) Design pressure p2.5MPa;
b) The center to cneter distance of two adjacent openings (for curved surfaces, this distance
shall be calculated according to the arc length) shall not be less than the sum of diameter of these two
openings; as for three or more adjacent openings, the center to cneter distance of any two openings
therein (for curved surfaces, this distance shall be calculated according to the arc length) shall not be
less than 2.5 times of the sum of diameter of these two openings;
c) The external diameter of connection pipe shall be less than or equal to 89mm;
d) The wall thickness of connection pipe shall meet the requirements of Table 6-1. Thereinto,
the corrosion allowance wall thickness of connection pipe is 1mm. if the corrosion allowance is
increased, then the wall thickness shall be increased accordingly;
e) The opening shall not be located on welding joint of Category A and CategoryCategory B;
f) Where the lower limit value of standard tensile strength of steels is Rm540MPa, the connection
of connection pipe with shell should adopt full penetration structural type.
Table 6-1 mm
External diameter of external pipe 25 32 38 45 48 57 65 76 89
Wall thickness of connection pipe 3.5 4.0 5.0 6.0
6.1.4 Welding joint nearby opening
The opening on the vessel should keep off the welding joint of the vessel. Where the opening
passes through or neighbor with the welding joint of the vessel, then it shall be ensured that there is no
71
discontinuities, which exceed the limit, exist on the joints within 2dop away from the opening center.
6.2.1 For the purpose of this chapter, the terms and definitions defined the general requirements
GB 150.1 apply.
6.2.2 Symbols
AThe cross sectional area of reinforcement required by opening weakening, mm2;
BThe effective width of reinforcement, mm;
CThe additional thickness (according to provisions of GB 150.1), mm;
CsThe additional thickness of cylinder;
CtThe additional thickness of connection pipe;
DThe diameter of the middle plane of cylinder, mm;
DoThe diameter of flat-cover, mm;
dopThe opening diameter, mm;
dThe diameter of the middle plane of connection pipe, mm;
doThe external diameter of connection pipe, mm;
frThe intensity weakening factor;
gThe reinforcement factor of connection pipe;
hThe reinforcement factor of cylinder;
h1The effective reinforcement height of outward extending connection pipe, mm;
h2The effective reinforcement height of inward extending connection pipe, mm;
KThe equivalent gross stress concentration factor;
KmThe equivalent membrane stress concentration factor;
nIIThe checking coefficient of equivalent membrane stress;
nIVThe checking coefficient of equivalent gross stress;
pThe design pressure, MPa;
pcThe calculating pressure (according to Chapter 3), MPa;
RThe radius of the middle plane of cylinder, mm;
RiThe internal radius of spherical shell or hemispherical head, and the internal radius of the
equivalent spherical face of ellipsoidal head or of the spherical face of dished head, mm;
RmThe lower limit value of steel standard tensile strength, MPa;
ReLThe standard yield strength of steels, MPa;

72
rThe radius of the middle plane of connection pipe, mm;
S1The axial pitch of tube hole, mm;
S2The unit length of ligament (see Figure 6-6 and Figure 6-7), mm;
S3The diagonal pitch of tube hole, mm;
SIIThe equivalent membrane stress, MPa;
SIVThe equivalent gross stress, MPa;
The calculated thickness of shell at opening, mm;
eThe effective thickness of shell at opening, mm;
etThe effective thickness of connection pipe, mm;
nThe nominal thickness of shell at opening, mm;
ntThe nominal thickness of connection pipe, mm;
pThe calculated thickness of flat-cover, mm;
tThe calculated thickness of connection pipe, mm;
The welding joint coefficient (according to those specified in GB 150.1);
v1The weakening factor of longitudinal ligament;
v2The equivalent weakening factor of longitudinal ligament;
v3The weakening factor of diagonal ligament;
The angle between the center line of two adjacent openings and the axis shell, ();
The opening rate, =d/D;
[]tThe allowable stress of the shell material at the design temperature (according to those
specified in GB 150.2), MPa;
[ ]tt The allowable stress of the connection pipe material at the design temperature (according
to those specified in GB 150.2), MPa.
6.3 Equal-area Method for Reinforcement of Single Opening
6.3.1 Application scope of single opening
Within the application scope (see 6.1.1) of equal-area method, a large number of openings meeting
the following conditions all shall be designed respectively according to single opening:
a) Where two openings are set in the shell, the center to center distance of these two openings
(for curved surfaces, this distance shall be calculated according to the arc length) shall not be less than
the sum of diameter of these two openings;
b) Where many openings are set in the flat head (panel), the diameter sum of any two openings
shall not exceed 0.5 times of the head diameter, and the center to center distance of any two adjacent
openings shall not be less than diameter sum of these two openings.
73
6.3.2 Structural type and material of reinforcement
6.3.2.1 Pad reinforcement
The welded constructions of reinforcing ring attached to connection pipe and shell are indicated
in Appendix D and JB/T 4736. Where these types of reinforcement constructions are used, the following
provisions shall be complied with:
a) The lower limit value of standard tensile strength of low alloy steels shall be: Rm<540MPa;
b) The thickness of reinforcing ring shall be less than or equal to 1.5n;
c) The nominal thickness of shell n<38mm.
If condition is permitted, a thick-wall connection pipe is recommended in lieu of the reinforcing

ring for opening reinforcement, and nt/n should be controlled within 0.5~2.
6.3.2.2 Integral reinforcement
Integral reinforcement is described as increasing the shell thickness or using thick-wall connection
pipe or integral reinforcement forging attached to the shell by full penetration welding. The welded
constructions are indicated in Appendix D.
6.3.2.3 Reinforcement material
The reinforcement material should be same as the shell material. If the allowable stress of
reinforcement material is less than that of shell material, then the reinforcement area shall be increased
according to the ratio of the allowable stress of shell material to the allowable stress of reinforcement
material. If the allowable stress of reinforcement material is larger than that of shell material, then the
required reinforcement area shall not be reduced.
Where the material of connection pipe is different from the shell material, the intensity weakening
factor fr= [ ]tt /[]t will be used to represent the ratio of the allowable stress of connection pipe material
to that of shell material at the design temperature, and when fr>1.0, fr=1.0.
6.3.3 Reinforcement for openings in shell
6.3.3.1 Calculated section of opening reinforcement
The required minimum reinforcement area shall be calculated on the following specified cross
sections: for the openings in cylinder body or conical shell, this cross section shall pass through the
center point of the shell opening and the cylinder axis; as for the openings in convex head and
spherical shell, this cross section shall pass through the center point of this opening in head, be along
the maximum dimension direction of this opening and be perpendicular to the shell surface.
As for the circular opening, dop shall take the internal diameter of connection pipe plus 2 times of
the additional thickness; as for the elliptical or obround opening, dop shall take the size (chord length)
on the considered cross section plus 2 times of the additional thickness.
6.3.3.2 Vessels under internal pressure
The required reinforcement area for the openings in shell shall be calculated according to
Formula (6-1):
A=dop+2et(1fr) (6-1)
74
Where For the abutting connection pipe, fr=1.0.
The calculated thickness, mm. It shall be determined according to the method below:
a) For the openings in the cylinder or spherical shell, it is the calculated thickness of shell
at the opening;
b) For the openings in conical shell (or conical head), it shall be calculated by Formula
(5-8), where Dc shall be the internal diameter of conical shell at the opening center;
c) When the opening is within the scope of 80% diameter around the center of ellipsoidal
head, shall be calculated by Formula (6-2) otherwise by Formula (5-1).
pc K1 Di
= (6-2)
2[ ]t 0.5 pc
Where K1The coefficient determined by the major-minor axis ratio of ellipsoidal head, looked
up from Table 5-2;
d) When the opening is on the spherical face of the dished head, shall be calculated by
Formula (6-3) otherwise by Formula (5-4).
pc R1
= (6-3)
2[ ] 0.5 pc
t
6.3.3.3 Vessels under external pressure
The required reinforcement area for the openings in shell shall be calculated according to
Formula (6-4):
A=0.5[dop+2et(1fr)] (6-4)
Where For the abutting connection pipe, fr=1.0;
The calculated thickness of shell at the opening, determined by calculating according

to external pressure, mm.
6.3.3.4 Where the vessel has two design conditions, namely internal pressure and external pressure,
the required reinforcement area for the openings shall comply with the requirements of 6.3.3.2 and
6.3.3.3 at the same time.
6.3.4 Reinforcement for openings in flat head
6.3.4.1 Where only one opening is set in the flat-cover and the opening diameter dop0.5Do (Do shall
take the calculated diameter of flat-cover; for the noncircular flat-cover, Do shall take the length of
minor axis), the required minimum reinforcement area shall be calculated according to Formula (6-5):
A=0.5dopp (6-5)
Where pThe calculated thickness of flat-cover, calculated according to Chapter 5, mm.
6.3.4.2 Where only one opening is set in the flat-cover and the opening diameter dop>0.5Do, then the
thickness of flat-cover shall be calculated according to 6.5.
6.3.5 Effective reinforcement scope and reinforcement area

75
When the opening reinforcement is calculated, the effective reinforcement scope and reinforcement
area shall be determined according to rectangular WXYZ scope in Figure 6-2.
A: A01+A02 (1fr)
A01: dop
A02: 2 et
A1: A11+A12 fr
Abutting (fr=1.0) A11: (Bdop) (e)2
A12: 2et (e)
a)
A2: A21 fr+A22 fr
A21: 2h1 (ett)
A22: 2h2 (etC2)
A3: Weld metal
A4: Added reinforcement area

Abutting (fr=1.0)
in effective scope
b)
Figure 6-2 Effective Reinforcement Rcope
6.3.5.1 Effective reinforcement scope
a) The effective width B shall be calculated according to Formula (6-6) and shall be taken with
the larger value:
2d op
B= (6-6)
d op + 2 n + 2 nt
b) The effective height shall be calculated according to Formula (6-7) and Formula (6-8) and
shall be taken with the smaller value in the formula respectively.
Effective reinforcement height of outward extending connection pipe:

76
d
h1 op nt (6-7)
Actual outward extending height of connection pipe
Effective reinforcement height of inward extending connection pipe:
d
h2 op nt (6-8)
Actual inward extending height of connection pipe
6.3.5.2 Reinforcement area
Within the effective reinforcement scope, the cross sectional area of reinforcement shall be
Ae=A1+A2+A3 (6-9)
Where AeThe reinforcement area, mm2;
A1The surplus area of the effective thickness of the shell minus the calculated thickness
(calculated according to Formula (6-10), mm2;
A1=(Bdop)(e)2et(e)(1fr) (6-10)
Note: For the abutting connection pipe, fr=1.0.
A2The surplus area of the effective thickness of connection pipe minus the calculated
thickness (calculated according to Formula 6-11), mm2;
A2= 2h1(ett)2h2(etc2) fr (6-11)
A3The cross sectional area of weld metal (see Figure 6-2), mm2.
If AeA, then no additional reinforcement is needed for the opening;
If Ae<A, then the opening shall be applied with additional reinforcement and the additional
reinforcement area shall be calculated according to Formula (6-12):
A4AAe (6-12)
Where A4The additional reinforcement area within the effective reinforcement scope (see Figure
6-2), mm2.
6.4 Equal-area Method for Reinforcement of Multiple Openings
6.4.1 Reinforcement of multiple openings in shell
a) Where the center to center distance of any two adjacent openings is less than the diameter
sum of these two openings and makes their reinforcement scope be overlapped (see Figure 6-3), then
the combined reinforcement shall be adopted within the shell normal section that passes through the
connecting line of the center points of these two openings. The total area of combined reinforcement
shall not be less than the sum of area (calculated according to 6.3.3 and 6.3.5) required for the
separate reinforcement of each opening, and the reinforcement area between two openings shall not be
less than 50% of the total reinforcement area required by them.
When the combined reinforcement area is calculated, any cross section shall not be counted in
77
repeatedly.
Where the connecting line of the centers of multiple openings is in one same straight line, openings
shall be paired successively for treatment, and the overlapped area shall be allocated according to the
diameter ratio of two adjacent openings.
b) For three or more openings, if the center to center distance of two adjacent openings is less
than the diameter sum of these two openings and the combined reinforcement is adopted (see Figure
6-4), then the center to center distance of these adjacent openings shall be at least equal to 4/3 times of
their average diameter. The reinforcement area between any two adjacent openings shall be at least
equal to 50% of the total reinforcement area required for these two openings.
Where the center to center distance of any two adjacent openings is less than 4/3 times of their
average diameter, any metal between these two openings shall not be reinforced, and these openings
must be reinforced according to method stated in c).
c) Adjacent openings of any quantity and any arrangement mode may be reinforced as one
hypothetical opening (the diameter includes all the close openings). The diameter of this hypothetical
opening shall not exceed those specified in 6.1.1, and metal of all the connection pipes shall not be
used as reinforcement.
d) Where a series of regularly arranged openings are set in the cylinder and every opening
therein cannot be reinforced separately, the reinforcement shall be carried out with by adopting with
the method stated in 6.4.2.
e) The structure type and materials for the reinforcement of multiple openings are referred to
the requirement of 6.3.2.
Reinforcement scope
Reinforcement scope
Opening
Opening
Figure 6-3 Adjacent Openings Figure 6-4 Multiple Openings
6.4.2 Requirements for reinforcement of ligament
Where ligament is set for the entire length (or part) of cylinder, the ligament weakening factor
shall be used in lieu of the welding joint coefficient in Formula (3-1) to conduct checking for the
cylinder (or part).
78
Axail direction
Figure 6-5 Example of Tube Spacing with Pitch of Openings Equal in Every Row
Axail direction
Figure 6-6 Example of Tube Spacing with Pitch of Openings Unequal in Every Second Row
Axail direction
Figure 6-7 Example of Tube Spacing with Pitch of Openings Unequal in Every Second and Third Row
Axail direction
Figure 6-8 Example of Tube Spacing with Openings on Diagonal Lines
79
a) Where the ligaments are regularly distributed along the axis of cylinder and where the pitch
of tube hole in each rows is equal (see Figure 6-5), the axial ligament weakening factor v1 shall be
calculated according to Formula (6-13); where the pitch of tube hole in any one row is nonuniform
(see Figure 6-6 and Figure 6-7), the average ligament weakening factor v1 shall be calculated according
to Formula (6-14).
S1 d op
v1 = (6-13)
S1
S 2 nd op
v1 = (6-14)
S2
Where nThe quantity of tube holes within a length of S2.
b) As for the multirow axial openings or the diagonal ligaments (see Figure 6-7), the weakening
of equivalent axial ligament and the weakening of diagonal ligament still shall be checked:
1) The equivalent weakening factor of axial ligament 2 shall be determined based on

angle and S3/dop according to Figure 6-9;
2) The weakening factor of axial ligament v1 shall be calculated according to Formula

(6-13); the weakening factor 3 of diagonal ligaments shall be determined based on S3/S2
and the v1 value according to Figure 6-10;
3) The minimum value among v1, v2 and v3 shall be taken.
c) Where the ligaments are irregularly distributed along the axis, the average ligament weakening
factor shall adopt the small value below:
1) Where the length is equal to any ligament segments of the internal diameter of cylinder
(shall be considered as 1500mm if the internal diameter of cylinder is larger than
1500mm), the ligament weakening factor of each segments shall be calculated, and the
minimum value is considered to be the average ligament weakening factors;
2) Where the length is equal to any ligament segments of the internal radius of cylinder
(shall be considered as 750mm if the internal radius of cylinder is larger than 750mm),
the ligament weakening factor of each segments shall be calculated, and 1.25 times of
the minimum value is considered to be the average ligament weakening factors;
d) Where the openings are set in one row and arranged non-axially on the cylinder, the
equivalent weakening factor of axial ligament v2 shall be determined based on the angle and S3/dop
according to Figure 6-9.
e) If necessary, it shall be checked that the axial stress withstood between the circumferential
ligaments of cylinder shall not exceed half of the circumferential stress withstood between the
ligaments of cylinder.
6.4.3 Multiple openings in flat-cover
The method of increasing the thickness of flat-cover to achieve reinforcement is applicable to:
the sum of width of all the openings in the dangerous radial section of flat-cover does not exceed Di/2,
80
and the center to center distance of any two adjacent openings is larger than 1.5 times but not larger
than 2 times of the average diameter of these two openings.
If the thickness of flat-cover is calculated according to Formula (5-32)~Formula (5-35), the

structural characteristic coefficient K of flat-cover thereinto shall consider the weakening of opening.
The wakening factor v shall be calculated according to Formula (6-15):
Dc b
v= (6-15)
Dc
Where DcThe calculated diameter of flat-cover (see Table 5-9 or Table 5-10), mm;
bThe sum of the width of all openings in the dangerous radial section of flat-cover, mm.
Equivalent weakening factor of axail ligament v2, %
Shell axis
Included angle between the diagonal line and the axis, ()
Note: 1 The equivalent weakening factor of axial ligament may also be calculated according to the formulae in Note 2, but it shall
not exceed the scope as shown by the abscissa and ordinate in the figure.
sec
sec 2 + 1 3 + sec 2
S /d
2 The equivalent weakening factor of axial ligament v = 3 op
1.5 + 0.5 sec 2
2
Figure 6-9 Calculating Chart for the Equivalent Weakening Factor of Axial Ligament of Diagonal Ligaments
81
Circumferential pitch
ts
Shell axis
en
am
lig
al
on
ag
di
of
nd
s
la
ent
na
gam
di
itu
l li
ng
lo
a
nti
of
Weakening factor of diagonal ligament v3, %
e
or
fer
ct
cum
fa
ng
cir
ni
ke
and
ea
lw
al
ua
on
eq
i ag
of
d
on
of
iti
or
nd
t
fac
co
of
ng
ve
eni
ur
ak
C
we
al
equ
of
ion
d it
onc
of
rve
Cu
Weakening factor of axail ligament 1, %
Note 1: v3 may also be calculated according to the formulae in Note 2 and Note 3, and the use of these formulae is permitted for
values beyond the scope specified in the figure.
J + 0.25 (1 v1 ) 0.75 + J
Note 2: v3 =
0.375 + 0.5 J
2
S .
Where J = 3
S2
Note 3: When the weakening factor of diagonal ligament is equal to that of circumferential ligament, the formula for calculating the
weakening factor of diagonal ligament shall be:
2 M + 1 2(1 v1 ) 1 + M
v3 =
1+ M
2
(1 v1 ) .
Where M =
(2 0.5v1 )
Figure 6-10 Calculating Chart for the Weakening Factor of Diagonal Ligaments
82
Determine the coefficient K1 on the basis of K obtained from Table 5-9 or Table 5-10:
K WhereK < 0.3

K1 =
0.3 WhereK 0.3
When K1/0.5, then the thickness of flat-cover shall be calculated by replacing K in Formula
(5-33)~Formula (5-35) with K1/ otherwise by adopting K value directly; when K1/0.5, other design
methods shall be adopted.
6.5 Reinforcement of Single Circular Opening (dop0.5Do)
6.5.1 The calculations for flat-covers with bolted connection shall be performed in accordance with
the provisions for flange structures prescribed in Chapter 7.
6.5.2 When the flat-covers of serial numbers of 2~7 as shown in Table 5-9 and the flat-covers as
shown in Table 5-10 (if the flat-cover is connected with the cylinder by butt welding, it must be fully
penetrated) have an opening with connection pipe (the juncture of flat-cover and connection pipe shall
be an integral structure or connected by full penetration welding) or without connection pipe (see
Figure 6-11), the calculation shall be performed in accordance with the following procedures, and the
stresses and opening structure shall meet the corresponding requirements (definitions of the symbols
not specified in calculation are same as 7.3).
0 (connection
pipe)
h (connection pipe)
This half depicts opening without connection pipe

1 (connection
pipe)
1 (cylinder)
h (cylinder)
dop (with
connection pipe) dop (without
connection pipe)
The juncture may have taper segment
or a round-comer transition
0 (cylinder)
Figure 6-11 Schematic Diagram of Integral Flat-cover with Large Central Opening
6.5.2.1 Neglecting the cylinder that is connected with the flat-cover, the calculated moment and
83
calculated stress of flat-cover shall be calculated according to the principles of flange calculation.
a) The calculated moment shall be calculated by Formula (6-16):
Mo=FDSD+FTST (6-16)
Where MoThe calculated moment, N mm;
FDThe acting force, which is calculated according to Formula (6-17), N;
2
FD=0.785d op pc (6-17)
SDThe moment arm, which is calculated according to Formula (6-18), mm;
Di (d op + 1 )
SD = (6-18)
2
1The thickness (at the connection pipe, see Figure 6-11), mm;
FTThe acting force, which is calculated according to Formula (6-19), N;
FT=0.785pc(D i2 d op
2
) (6-19)
STThe moment arm, which is calculated according to Formula (6-20), mm.
Di d op
ST = (6-20)
4
b) The calculated stress shall be calculated by Formula (6-21)~Formula (6-23) with K=Do/d:
fM o
H = (6-21)
12 d op
(1.33 p e + 1) M o
R = (6-22)
p2 d op
YM o
T = Z R (6-23)
p2 d op
Where H, R, TThe calculated stress, MPa; as for the opening without connection pipe,
H=R=0;
f, , e, Y, ZSee 7.3, therein, f, and e hall be determined according to the parameters

of connection pipe at the opening in flat-cover; Y and Z are obtained from
corresponding Figures and Tables;
1The thickness (at the connection pipe, see Figure 6-11), mm.
6.5.2.2 The stress at the juncture of cylinder and flat-cover shall be calculated according to the
84
following procedures.
a) Calculate the parameter (E) by Formula (6-24) or Formula (6-25):
With connection pipe:

0.91 1 Di1VI
( E ) = 0 H (6-24)
fho
Without connection pipe:
d op
( E ) = T (6-25)
p
Di + 1 ( f < 1.0)
Where Di1 = ;
Di + 0 ( f 1.0)
(E)The parameter, MPa;
1, 0The thickness (at the connection pipe, see Figure 6-11), mm;
V1, f, hoSee 7.3, determined according to the parameters of connection pipe at the opening
in flat-cover.
b) Calculate MH by Formula (6-26):
( E )
MH = (6-26)
1.74hoVI ( E ) F1 p
+ 1 +
03 Di1 M o ho
Where MHThe moment acting on the juncture of external diameter of flat head with the
cylinder, N mm;
ho, VI, Di1, FISee 7.3, determined according to the parameters of the cylinder at external diameter
of flat-cover;
0The thickness (at the cylinder, see Figure 6-11), mm.
c) Calculate x1 by Formula (6-27):
F
M o M H 1 + I p
ho
x1 = (6-27)
Mo
Where x1The parameter;
FI, hoSee 7.3, determined according to the parameters of the cylinder at external diameter
of flat-cover.
d) Calculate the axial stress Hs, radial stress Rs and circumferential stress Ts at the juncture of
85
the flat-cover and cylinder by Formula (6-28)~Formula (6-30):
1.1ho f
HS = x1 ( E ) 2
(6-28)
1
DiVI
0
F
1.91M H 1 + I p
Rs = ho 0.64 FI M H
+ (6-29)
Di p 2
Di ho p
F
0.571 + I p M H
x ( E ) p ho 0.64 FI Z1M H
Ts = 1 + (6-30)
Di Di p
2
Di ho p
Where ho, V1, f, FISee 7.3, determined according to the parameters of the cylinder at external
diameter of flat-cover;
1, 0The thickness (at the cylinder, see Figure 6-11), mm;
Z1The coefficient, which is calculated according to Formula (6-31):
K 2 +1
Z1 = (6-31)
K 2 1
KThe coefficient, which is calculated according to Formula (6-32):
K=Do/dop (6-32)
6.5.2.3 Calculation of stresses at opening in flat-cover
Calculate the axial stress of neck at opening in flat cover Ho, radial stress at opening in flat cover
Ro and circumferential stress To by Formula (6-33)~Formula (6-35):
Ho = x1 H (6-33)
Ro = x1 R (6-34)
0.64 FI Z 2 M H
To = x1 T + (6-35)
Di ho p
Where FI, hoSee 7.3, determined according to the parameters of the cylinder at external
diameter of flat-cover;
Z2The coefficient.
2K 2
Z2 = (6-36)
K 2 1
86
6.5.2.4 Stress checking
In above calculations, the stresses Hs, Rs and Ts at the juncture of the flat-cover and cylinder
and the stresses Ho, Ro and To at the opening in flat-cover all shall conform to the requirements
given in 7.5.3.4.
6.6 Analysis Method for the Opening Reinforcement Design of Radial Connection Pipe of
Cylinder
This section gives another method for the opening reinforcement design of the cylinder with
radial parallel and level connection pipes under the action of internal pressure, this calculation method
is a stress analysis method of the opening reinforcement of cylinder obtained according to the elastic
thin shell theory, and the mechanical model is as shown in Figure 6-12 a). Within the application
scope of reinforcement covered in this method, the calculation results obtained by this method have
the same designed reliability as the calculation results obtained by the above-mentioned equal-area
reinforcement method.
This calculation method may be conservatively used for the calculation of such reinforcement
with radial inward extending connection pipe.
Two equivalent reinforcement calculation means are given in this section, and one of which may
be selected as required:
a) Equivalent stress checking;
b) Size design of reinforcement structure.
Where the opening reinforcement calculation of the pressure vessel cylinder is of special
requirements (such as the vessel, which may be designed according to this standard, from a nuclear-
energy device), only the equivalent stress checking is applicable.
The analysis method for the opening reinforcement calculation of connection pipe of cylinder in
a combined action of the internal pressure and the external load of connection pipe will be separately
issued in addition.
6.6.1 Application scope
a) It is applicable to the cylinder having a single radial parallel and level connection pipe under
the action of internal pressure;
b) Where a cylinder is set with two or more openings, then the spacing between the edges of
two adjacent openings shall not be less than 2 Di n ;
c) For the materials of cylinder, connection pipe and reinforcement, the ratio of the standard
yield strength at (below) ambient temperature to the lower limit of the standard tensile strength at
ambient temperature meets ReL/Rm0.8;
d) The connection of the connection pipe or reinforcement with the shell shall be adopted with
welding with the cross section being fully penetrated, thereby to ensure the integrity of reinforcement
structure;
e) When integral reinforcement is carried out for shell or connection pipe, the reinforcement
dimension scope shall be met (the distance from the intersecting line of connection pipe and cylinder
87
to the edge of reinforcement area): for shell, l > Di n ; for connection pipe, lt > d o nt or the
cylinder body may be thickened integrally; the welding joint of Category A and Category B within the
reinforcement scope must be free of any discontinuities which exceed the limit, and if necessary, the
non-destructive inspection may be required;
f) The leg dimensions of fillet weld between the cylinder and connection pipe shall not be less
than n/2 and nt/2 respectively, the corner radius at the intersecting line of the inner wall of connection
pipe and inner wall of cylinder shall be between n/8 and n/2, as shown in Figure 6-12 b);
g) The design method is applicable to the range of the following parameters:
0.9
max[0.5, ]et/e2
Figure 6-12 Mechanical Model of Analysis Method for the Opening Reinforcement Design
6.6.2 Equivalent stress checking
6.6.2.1 Calculation procedures
a) Calculate the diameter D and d of the middle planes of cylinder and connection pipe according
to Formula (6-37) and Formula (6-38):
D=Di+e+2Cs (6-37)
d=d0et (6-38)
b) Set the opening parameter as = D/ e = d / De and calculate , and et/e;
c) Obtain Km and K by looking up the curve diagram set 6-13 based on , and et/e;
d) Calculate the equivalent membrane stress SII and equivalent gross stress SIV according to
Formula (6-39) and Formula (6-40):
pD
S II = K m (6-39)
2 e
pD
S IV = K (6-40)
2 e
e) Check and calculate according to Formula (6-41) and Formula (6-42):
88
SIInII[]t (6-41)
SIVnIV[]t (6-42)
Where nIIAdopt 2.2 (as for pressure vessels with special requirements, adopt 1.5~2.2);
nIVAdopt 2.6;
[]tThe allowable stress of materials at design temperature, MPa; where the materials
of cylinder, connection pipe and reinforcement are different, the smaller value therein
shall be taken;
[] st The allowable stress of the material of cylinder at design temperature, MPa;
[] tt The allowable stress of the material of connection pipe at design temperature, MPa.
6.6.2.2 Thickness adjustment
In case the checking condition of equivalent stress stated in 6.6.2.1 can be satisfied, the following
two possible modes are provided to adjust the thickness of connection pipe or cylinder so as to
achieve structural design rationality:
a) The thickness of cylinder shall be increaased directly and appropriately, and the recalculation
shall be carried out according to the procedures in 6.6.2.1 till the checking conditions are met.
b) Firstly, the thickness of connection pipe shall be increased, and then the thickness of cylinder
may be increased where necessary:
1) Determine the calculated thickness of cylinder:
pD
= (6-43)
2[ ]st
2) Calculation aiming at SII (or SIV) not meeting the checking conditions:
e [ ]t [ ]t
K m = nII or, K = 2.6 e (6-44)
[ ]st [ ]st
3) In the curve diagram set 6-13, Km' (or K') shall be found out in the ordinate Km (or K) of
curve with the opening rate =d/D, a line shall be drawn rightward along the horizontal
line by passing through this point and be intersected with the vertical line of the
corresponding value, and the [et/e] value of this group of parameters of curve shall
be obtained through this intersection point, and the interpolation method shall be
adopted in case of intermediate value;
4) The thickness of connection pipe shall be increased according to the ratio of [et/e];
5) In 3), if the intersection point is outside the scope of curve set of [et/e], then the value
shall not be obtained by extending, and it is considerable to increase the shell thickness
e and recalculate according to 6.6.2.1 till the checking conditions are met.
6.6.2.3 Calculation table of equivalent stress checking (see Table 6-2)
89
Table 6-2 Calculation Table of the Equivalent Stress Checking of Opening Reinforcement for Cylinder
I. Known conditions
Design pressure MPa =
Design temperature
Cylinder Connection pipe
Allowable stress of material MPa [ ]st = [ ]tt =
Internal diameter (external diameter) mm Di= Do=
Nominal thickness mm n= nt=
Additional thickness mm Cs= Ct=
II. Calculation of parameters
Effective thickness mm e= n-Cs et= nt-Ct
Diameter of middle plane mm D= Di+e+2Cs d= d0-et
Circumferential membrane stress MPa 0= pD/2e
Allowable stress of material MPa []t= min([ ]st , [ ]tt )
Parameter et/e=
Parameter D/e=
Opening rate d/D
III. Looking up the diagrams
Path I Path II
downward and upward rounded to (1) (2) (1) (2)
= D / e (1) = (1) D / e ( 2) = ( 2) D / e = d / D e
Look up the diagram, Km= Km(1) Km(2) Km(1) Km(2)
Look up the diagram, K= K(1) K(2) K(1) K(2)
Km (according to interpolation method)
K (according to interpolation method)
IV. Result and checking
Equivalent membrane stress MPa SII= Km0 Km0
Equivalent gross stress MPa SIV= K0 K0
Allowable value [SII] MPa [SII]= nII[]t nII[]t
Allowable value [SIV] MPa [SIV]= 2.6[]t 2.6[]t
SII[SII]
Checking
SIV[SIV]
Note: Any one of the parallel path I and path II in this Table may be selected.
90
Figure 6-13
91
Figure 6-13 (continued)
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
6.6.3 Size design of reinforcement structure
6.6.3.1 Procedures of the design calculation
a) Preliminarily set the initial thickness e(0) , et(0) of cylinder and connection pipe according to
the strength and structure design;
b) Calculate the radius R and r of the middle planes of cylinder and connection pipe:
R=D/2=(Di+ (0)
e )/2+Cs
r=d/2=(d0 et(0) )/2
c) Calculate the opening rate:
=d/D=r/R
d) Calculate the intermediate parameter:
U=[]t/p(=R/=r/t)
e) Calculate the calculated thickness of cylinder and connection pipe:
=R/U
t=r/U
f) Calculate the initial reinforcement factor:
h(0)= (10)
e /
g(0)= (0)
et /t
g) In consideration of the rationality of structure design, any one mode shall be selected from
the above two possible modes (see Mode I and Mode II in Table 6-3) to calculate the required
thickness of connection pipe or cylinder:
1) Mode I
Suppose h=h(0) look up the curve diagram set 6-14 based on , U and h, and adopt
interpolation method in case of intermediate value, and obtain gmin (do not take value by
extending outward in case of exceeding the value range of curve; it shall change the value of
h(0) and perform calculation again).
Calculation: (t)min=gmint
Checking: (t)min (0)

et
2) Mode II
Suppose g=g(0), look up the diagram set 6-14 based on , U and g, adopt the interpolation
method on meeting intermediate value, and the procedures are as follows: respectively
100
obtain the pitch diameter d(1) and d(2) and the calculated thickness t(1) and t(2) of the
corresponding connection pipe through calculation according to the (1) and (2) at the two
opening rate end points in the interpolation section, and then calculate the reinforcement
factor of corresponding connection pipe:
g(1)= (0)
et /t(1)
g(2)= (0)
et /t(2)
Look up the diagrams, obtain h(1) according to (1), U and g(1), and obtain h(2) according to
(2), U and g(2);
Interpolate between h(1) and h(2) according to and obtain hmin (not be value by extending
outward in case of exceeding the value range of curve; it shall change the value of g(0) and
then perform calculation again).
Calculation: min=hmin
Checking:min (0)
e
h) Where the above-mentioned thickness checking conditions cannot be met, then the effective
thickness of connection pipe or cylinder may be appropriately increased, and recalculation shall be
carried out till the checking conditions are met.
6.6.3.2 Size design table of reinforcement structure (see Table 6-3)
Table 6-3 Design Calculation Table of the Size of Opening Reinforcement Structure for Cylinder
I. Known conditions
Design pressure MPa =
Design temperature
Allowable stress of material MPa [ ]st = [ ]tt =
Internal diameter (external diameter) mm Di= Do=
Nominal thickness mm n= nt=
Additional thickness mm Cs= Ct=
II. Calculation of parameters
Effective thickness mm e(0) = n-Cs et(0) = nt-Ct
Diameter of middle plane mm D= Di + (0)

e + 2Cs d= d 0 et(0)
Allowable stress of material MPa []t= min([ ]st , [ ]tt )
Intermediate parameter MPa U= Sm/p
Calculated thickness mm = R/U t= r/U
Reinforcement factor h(0)= e(0) / g(0) = et(0) / t
Opening rate d/D
101
III. Looking up the diagrams and results
downward and upward rounded to (1)= (2)=
Mode I Suppose h=h(0) Obtain g by looking up the curves based on , U and h
Look up the diagram, and obtain g based on U

g(1)= g[U, h, (1)] g(2)= g[U, h, (2)]
and h
Obtain gmin by interpolating according to gmin=
Minimum wall thickness of the required

mm (t)min= gmint
connection pipe (t)min
Checking Require et(0) ( t ) min
Mode II Suppose g=g(0) Obtain h by looking up the curves based on , U and g
Pitch diameter of connection pipe d(n) mm d(1)= D(1) d(2)= D(2)
Calculated thickness of connection pipe t(n) mm t(1)= d(1)/2U t(2)= d(2)/2U
Calculate g(n) g(1)= (0)

et / (1) g(2)= et(0) / ( 2 )
Look up the diagram, and obtain h based on U

h(1)= h[U, g(1), (1)] h(2)= h[U, g(2), (2)]
and g(n)
Obtain hmin by interpolating according to mm hmin=
Minimum thickness of required cylinder min min= hmin
Checking Require (0)

e min
Figure 6-14
102
c)
103
d)
e)
104
105
106
7 Flange
7.1 General Provision
7.1.1 This Chapter is applicable to the design of bolted flange connection for hydrostatic pressure
and gasket compacting pressure. When the Standards JB 4700~4707 are applied, the calculation stated
in this Chapter may be exempted.
7.1.2 The design of bolted flange connection includes:
a) The determination of the materials, types and dimensions of the gaskets;
b) The determination of the materials, specifications and quantity of the bolts;
c) The determination of the materials, sealing surface types and structural dimensions of the
flanges;
d) The stress checking shall be carried out, and the corrosion allowance is not included in all
dimensions for calculating;
e) As for narrow face integral flange under internal pressure and for narrow face optional type
flange calculated in accordance with integral flange, they shall undergo rigidity checking.
7.1.3 The material selection of bolts and flanges shall meet the requirements of GB 150.2.
7.1.4 The hubbed flange shall be fabricated by hot rolling or forging processing. The post-processed
flange axes must be parallel with the original billet axes. Where the hubbed flange is fabricated by
adopting steel plate, the following requirements shall be met:
a) The ultrasonic testing shall be carried out for steel plate which shall be free from such defect
as layering;
b) The batten shall be cut out along the rolling direction for steel plate fabrication, then applied
with bending and butt welding to become a circular ring, making the steel plate surface into the side
surface of the ring;
c) Fully penetrated butt joint shall be adopted for the circular ring;
d) The butt joint of the circular ring shall be applied with post-weld heat treatment and 100%
ray testing or ultrasonic testing, and the approval standard shall be specified according to the requirements
of JB 4700.
7.1.5 Normalizing or full annealing heat treatment shall be carried out for flange fabricated with
carbon steels or low alloy steels under any of the following conditions:
a) Flange with a sectional thickness greater than 50mm;
b) Forged flange.
7.1.6 Post-weld heat treatment shall be carried out for the butt weld of flange ring fabricated with
carbon steel or low alloy steel plates or sectional materials and for the welded integral flange [see
Figure 7-1g)].
7.1.7 The nominal diameter of bolt shall not be less than M12. Where the nominal diameter is
greater than M48, fine thread shall be adopted.
107
7.2 Classification of Flanges
7.2.1 Narrow contact face flange: the contact surface of gasket shall be located within the circumference
enclosed by the flange bolt hole; its common structure types are detailed in Figure 7-1 and Figure 7-2,
and the calculation method shall be in accordance with those specified in 7.5.
As for special structure type of narrow face flanges, such as counter flange, the calculation
method is in accordance with 7.6 and the structural calculation for cylindrical end is in accordance
with 7.7.
7.2.2 Wide contact face flange: the contact surface of gasket is distributed at the internal and
external sides of the center circle of flange bolt, and the calculation method shall be in accordance
with those specified in 7.8.
7.3.1 The terms and definitions defined in general requirements GB 150.1 is applicable to this
Chapter.
7.3.2 Symbols
AaThe minimum total cross section area of bolt required under pre-tightening state, mm2;
AbThe actually used total cross section area of bolt, mm2;
AmThe total cross section area required for bolt, mm2;
ApThe total cross section area of bolt required under operating state, mm2;
bThe effective sealing width of gasket, mm;
boThe basic sealing width of gasket, mm;
DbThe diameter of center circle in bolts, mm;
DGThe diameter of the center circle applied with the compacting pressure on gasket (see
Figure 7-1), mm;
Di1The calculated diameter of flange, mm;
DoThe external diameter of flange (for flange with slotted bolt hole of swing bolt, it refers
to the diameter of the circle at the slotted hole bottom. And for cylindrical end, it refers
to the external diameter of the cylindrical end), mm;
D2The external diameter of the sealing surface of cylindrical end, mm;
d1The parameter, see Formula 7-16 or Table 7-5, mm3;
dBThe nominal diameter of bolt, mm;
dbThe diameter of bolt hole, mm;
EThe elasticity modulus of flange materials, (according to GB150.2), MPa;
eThe parameter, see Formula (7-16) or Table 7-5, mm 1;
FThe total axial force caused by internal pressure, N;
108
fThe correction coefficient for the stress at the neck of the integral flange (the ratio of the
small end stress to the large end stress of the flange neck);
FaThe minimum gasket compacting pressure required under pre-tightening state, N;
FDThe axial force caused by internal pressure applied on the cross section of flange internal
diameter, N;
FGThe gasket compacting pressure of narrow contact face flange, including Fa, Fp, W (pre-
tightening) three conditions, N;
FIThe integral flange coefficient, which shall be determined by looking up Figure 7-3 and
Table 7-8 or calculated according to those specified in Table 7-7;
FLThe coefficient of the loose type flange with neck, which shall be determined by looking
up Figure 7-5 or calculated according to those specified in Table 7-7;
FpThe minimum gasket compacting pressure required under operating state, N;
FTThe difference between the total axial force F caused by internal pressure and FD, N;
hThe height of flange neck, it is the height of column segment on the end for cylindrical
end, mm;
hoThe parameter, see Formula (7-16) or Table 7-5, mm;
JThe stiffness index of flange;
KThe ratio of flange external diameter to flange internal diameter;

)
L The minimum spacing between adjacent bolts (see Table 7-3), mm;
LAThe radial distance from bolt center to the intersection point of flange neck (or weld) and
flange back (see Table 7-3), mm;
LDThe radial distance from bolt center to applying position for FD (see Figure 7-1), mm;
LeThe radial distance from bolt center to flange external diameter (see Figure 7-3), mm;
LGThe radial distance from bolt center to applying position for FG (see Figure 7-1), mm;
LTThe radial distance from bolt center to applying position for FT (see Figure 7-1), mm;
MThe bending moment applied on the longitudinal cross section of cylindrical end, N mm;
mThe gasket factor, (see Table 7-2);
MaThe pre-tightening moment of flange, N mm;
MoThe design moment of flange, N mm;
MpThe operation moment of flange, N mm;
NThe contact width of gasket (see Table 7-1), mm;
nThe bolt quantity;
109
TThe K-related coefficient, which shall be determined by looking up Figure 7-8 or Table 7-9;
UThe K-related coefficient, which shall be determined by looking up Figure 7-8 or Table 7-9;
VIThe integral flange coefficient, which shall be determined by looking up Figure 7-4 or
calculated according to those specified in Table 7-7 and 7-8;
VLThe coefficient of the loose type flange with neck, which shall be determined by looking
up Figure 7-6 or calculated according to those specified in Table 7-7;
WThe design load of bolt, N;
WaThe minimum bolt load required under pre-tightening state (namely, the minimum gasket
compacting pressure required under pre-tightening state Fa), N;
WpThe minimum bolt load required under operating state, N;
YThe K-related coefficient, which shall be determined by looking up Figure 7-5 or Table
7-8;
yThe specific pressure of gasket, which shall be determined by looking up Table 7-2, MPa;
ZThe K-related coefficient, which shall be determined by looking up Figure 7-9 or Table
7-8;
ZgThe section modulus in bending for the longitudinal cross section of cylindrical end, mm3;
The coefficient, which shall be calculated according to those specified in Table 7-5;
fThe effective thickness of flange, mm;
0The effective thickness of the small end at flange neck, mm;
1The effective thickness of the large end at flange neck, mm;
The coefficient, see Formula (7-16) or Table 7-5;
HThe axial stress at flange neck, MPa;
RThe radial stress of flange ring, MPa;
TThe tangential stress of flange ring, MPa;
[]bThe allowable stress of bolt materials at ambient temperature (according to GB150.2),

MPa;
[ ]bt The allowable stress of bolt materials at the design temperature (according to GB 150.2),
MPa;
[]fThe allowable stress of the flange materials at the ambient temperature (according to GB
150.2), MPa;
[ ]ft The allowable stress of the flange materials at design temperature (according to GB
150.2), MPa;
110
[]nThe allowable stress of the cylindrical materials at the ambient temperature (according to
GB 150.2), MPa;
[ ]nt The allowable stress of cylindrical materials at design temperature, (according to GB

150.2), MPa;
The cut (shear) stress, MPa;
The coefficient, which shall be calculated according to those specified in Table 7-5.
7.4 Flange Type
7.4.1 The flange types are classified as three types according to the integrity degree of flanges (see
Figure 7-1);
7.4.2 Loose type flange: it refers to the kind of flange that is not able to be effectively connected
into an integrity with a vessel or connection pipe, and it does not have an equivalent structural
strength within integral connection.
See a-1) and b-1) in Figure 7-1 for loose type flange and its loading position, the typical loose
type flange-lap joint flange whose structure is shown in a-1) of Figure 7-1 as a type without neck
(namely the part with real lines), its calculation shall be carried out according to those specified in
Table 7-6. The loose type flange with neck may be calculated according to integral flange (Table 7-5),
but the coefficients VI, FI shall be replaced by VL, FL. Take f as 1.0, and the force arm LD=LA+1.
7.4.3 Integral flange: it refers that the flange, flange neck and vessel/connection pipe are able to be
connected effectively into an integral structure.
Various types of integral flange and various loading positions are shown as c), d), e), f) and g) in
Figure 7-1, and they shall be calculated according to those specified in Table 7-5.
7.4.4 Optional type flange, see h), i). j) and k) in Figure 7-1 for welding flange as an example, shall
be calculated according to integral flange (Table 7-5), yet in order to be more handy, it may be
calculated according to lap joint flange (Table 7-6) in case of the following conditions:
a) 015mm, Di/0300;
b) p2 MPa;
c) The design temperature is less than or equal to 370.
Loose type flange
Gasket
Gasket
Take the center of the contact surface between flange and flanged edge Single-side or both-side full penetration
111
Integral flange
Gasket Gasket
1:3 (maximum)
Slope >1:3
Slope >1:3
1:3 (maximum)
Weld center line Weld center line
The minimum height of weld leg shall be 0.250

Gasket and shall not be less than 6mm. Where the weld
becomes a round angle by adding l as it is
shown in Figure c), take 1=0
Figure 7-1 Flange Types

112
Optional type flange
n, and not less than 6mm
h) i)
a+bn
cn
'f(the smaller one between n
and 6mm)
j) k)
Note 1: Loose type flange with neck, where the neck slope is not greater than 6, take 1= 0 for calculation.
Note 2: Integral flange with neck, when the neck slope is greater than 1:3, the structure shown in Figure e) and f) shall be adopted.
Note 3: The minimum corner radius shall be 0.251 and not less than 4.5mm.
Note 4: The shoulder height of mortice, rough and plane sealing surfaces are not included in effective flange thickness.
Processing after welding
Processing after welding
See Note 1 See Note 1
Use for flange without neck
F20.75n F20.7n
F1=1.0n, but not greater than 16mm F1=1.0n, but not greater than 10mm
a-1) Flat welding flange with neck a-2) Flat welding flange
113
Processing after welding Processing after welding
Weld dimension Weld dimension
B=n B=n
C=n C=n
An, A=1/2n, but not less than 4.5mm
Bulge it for convenient

welding when assembling
b-1) Flange welded both at front and back surfaces b-2) Flange welded both at inner side and back surfaces
Applicable type
Universal butt joint
Recommended type
c-1) Welding neck flange
Weld dimension
B=
C=
A=1/2, but not less than 4.5mm
Universal butt joint

I or II
c-2) Welding neck flange (made of pates) c-3) Lap joint flange with welding ring
I II
Not to scale Not to scale
=15~30
b=0~3mm
r=b~13mm
Note 1: The spacing between the flange internal diameter and cylinder external diameter in Figure a-1), a-2), b-1) and b-2) shall not be
greater than 3mm, the total radial spacing shall not be greater than 4.5mm.
Note 2: The maximum and minimum value of g2 shall be determined according to the applied welding technology (such as the welding
rod type and dimension) and welding position. g2 shall not be greater than 3mm; the total radial spacing shall not be greater
than 4.5mm.
Figure 7-2 Flange Structure

114
Table 7-1 Basic Sealing Width of Gasket
Basic sealing width of gasket bo

No. Shape of impaction surface (sketch)
I II
1a
N N
2 2
1b
1c
+ g + g
2 2
+ N + N
maximum maximum
4 4
1d
+N + 3N
2
4 8
N 3N
3
4 8
3N 7N
4
8 16
N 3N
5
4 8

6
8
Note: As for No. 4 and No. 5, where the saw tooth depth is not greater than 0.4mm and teeth space is not greater than 0.8mm, the shape
of impaction surface shown in 1b or 1d shall be adopted.
115
Table 7-2 Characteristic Parameter for Common Gasket
Gasket Specific Shape of I

Type (see
Gasket material factor pressure Sketch mpaction surface
Table 7-1)
m Y MPa (see Table 7-1)
As for synthetic rubber without textile or with a

little amount of asbestos fiber;
The shore hardness is less than 75 0.50 0
The shore hardness is larger than or equal to 75 1.00 1.4
Thickness 3mm 2.00 11

With proper reinforced
asbestos (asbestos Thickness 1.5mm 2.75 25.5
rubber sheet)
Thickness 0.75mm 3.50 44.8
1 (a, b, c, d)
4, 5
Rubber with cotton fiber inside 1.25 2.8
Rubber with asbestos fiber inside, metal streng-

thening wire is included or not included
3 layers 2.25 15.2
2 layers 2.50 20
1 layer 2.75 25.5
1 (a, b, c, d)
Vegetable fiber 1.75 7.6 II
4, 5
Winding metal filled Carbon steel 2.50 69
with asbestos Stainless steel or Monel 3.00 69
Soft aluminum 2.50 20

The shell of the
Soft copper or brass 2.75 26 1 (a, b)
corrugated metal plate
with asbestos inside or Iron or soft steel 3.00 31
the corrugated metal Monel or 4%~6% 3.25 38

plate with asbestos chromium steel
inside
Stainless steel 3.50 44.8
Soft aluminum 2.75 25.5
Soft copper or brass 3.00 31
Iron or soft steel 3.25 38

Corrugated metal plate 1 (a, b, c, d)
Monel or 4%~6% 3.50 44.8
chromium steel
116
Table 7-2 Characteristic Parameter for Common Gasket
Gasket Specific Shape of I

Type (see
Gasket material factor pressure Sketch mpaction surface
Table 7-1)
m Y MPa (see Table 7-1)
Soft copper or brass 3.50 44.8
Flat metal plate with Iron or soft steel 3.75 52.4

1a, 1b, 1c, 1d, 2
asbestos inside Monel or 4%~6% 3.50 55.2
chromium steel 3.75 62.1

II
Iron or soft steel 3.75 52.4 1 (a, b, c, d)

Grooved metal
Monel or 4%~6% 3.75 62.1 2, 3
chromium steel
Composite flexible stone

Carbon steel
Graphite corrugated 3.0 50 1 (a, b)
Stainless steel
tooth metal plate
Soft aluminum 4.00 60.7
Iron or soft steel 5.50 124.1 1 (a, b, c, d)

Metal plate
Monel or 4%~6% 6.00 150.3 2, 3, 4, 5
chromium steel
I
Iron or soft steel 5.50 124.1
Monel or 4%~6% 6.00 150.3

Metal ring 6
chromium steel
Note 1: The value m and y of all gaskets and applicable shape of the impaction surface listed in this Table are recommended information.
The flanges with the gasket parameters (m, y) recommended in this Table and designed according to the requirements in this
Chapter, under general application conditions, are usually able to result a relatively favorable using effect. But as for those
occasions with a fairly tough condition, such as the gasket used in some tough medium (like cyanide), the parameter m and y
shall be determined with care according to sophisticated application experience.
Note 2: As for flat metal plate with asbestos inside, if the shape of impaction surface belongs to 1c, 1d and 2, the overlapping joint on the
gasket surface shall not be located at the convex side.
117
7.5 Narrow Contact Face Flange
7.5.1 Gasket
7.5.1.1 Characteristic parameters (m, y) of all common gaskets shall be determined by looking up
Table 7-2.
7.5.1.2 Effective sealing width of gasket
After the gasket dimension is determined, the contact width N and the basic sealing width bo of
the gasket shall be determined according to Table 7-1; then the effective sealing width of the gasket b
shall be calculated according to the following provisions;
Where bo6.4mm, b=bo;
Where bo>6.4mm, b=2.53 bo .
7.5.1.3 Diameter of the center circle applied with the compacting pressure of the gasket
The diameter of the center circle applied with the compacting pressure of the gasket shall be
determined according to the requirements below:
a) As for the lap joint flange shown as a-1) and a-2) in Figures 7-1, the diameter of the center
circle applied with the compacting pressure of the gasket DG shall be the average diameter of the
contact surface between the flange and flanged edge.
b) As for other types of flanges, DG shall be calculated according to the following requirements:
Where bo6.4mm, DG is equal to the average diameter of the gasket contact surface;
Where bo>6.4mm, DG is equal to the external diameter of the gasket contact surface deducting
2b;
c) As for cylindrical end, DG is equal to the average diameter of the sealing surface.
7.5.1.4 Compacting pressure of gasket
The compacting pressure of gasket shall be calculated according to the requirements below:
a) The minimum compacting pressure required for the gasket under pre-tightening state shall
be calculated according to formula (7-1):
Fa=3.14DGby (7-1)
b) The minimum compacting pressure required for the gasket under operating state shall be
calculated according to formula (7-2):
Fp=6.28DGbmpc (7-2)
7.5.1.5 Gasket width
Where the gasket is applied with the maximum bolt load under pre-tightening state, its sealing
performance will be lost if it is compacted excessively tight. The gasket shall be with adequate width
which may be determined according to experiences.
7.5.2 Bolt
7.5.2.1 Arrangement of bolt

118
The arrangement of bolt is generally determined according to the requirements below:
)
a) The minimum value of the flange radial dimensions LA, Le and the spacing L between
bolts may be selected according to those specified in Table 7-3;
)
b) The maximum spacing L max between bolts should not exceed the value calculated through
Formula (7-3):
) 6 f
Lmax = 2d B + (7-3)
m + 0.5
)
Table 7-3 Minimum Value of LA, Le, L
(On the Db)
a) b)
Nominal diameter of LA ) Nominal diameter of LA )

Le L Le L
bolt dB Group A Group B bolt dB Group A Group B
12 20 16 16 32 30 44 35 30 70
16 24 20 18 38 36 48 38 36 80
20 30 24 20 46 42 56 42 90
22 32 26 24 52 48 60 48 102
24 34 27 26 56 56 70 55 116
27 38 30 28 62
Note 1: Data under Group A in this Table are applicable to the hubbed flange structure shown in Figure a). Data under Group B in this
Table are applicable to the welded flange structure shown in Figure b).
Note 2: As for the lap joint flange shown as a-1) and a-2) in Figures 7-1, its radial size LD shall meet the requirement of the minimum LA
of Group A as well.
7.5.2.2 Bolt load
The bolt load shall be calculated according to the requirements below:
a) The minimum bolt load required under pre-tightening state shall be calculated according to
Formula (7-4):
Wa=Fa (7-4)
b) The minimum bolt load required under operating state shall be calculated according to
formula (7-5):
The total axial force F caused by internal pressure shall be calculated according to Formula
(7-5):
F=0.785D G2 pc (7-5)
The minimum bolt load shall be calculated according to Formula (7-6):

119
Wp=F+Fp (7-6)
Note: During the design of flanges, such as the design of companion flange on both sides of U-pipe heat exchanger, due to the
possible different pressures and different gaskets applied on both sides, so the conditions on both sides shall be considered
simultaneously during bolt design. It is required that the design shall be carried out by applying the greater bolt load, and the
design moment of flange shall be calculated according to the same principle.
7.5.2.3 Bolt area
The bole area shall be determined according to the requirement below:
a) The minimum bolt area required under pre-tightening state shall be calculated according to
Formula (7-7):
Wa
Aa = (7-7)
[ ]b
b) The minimum bolt area required under operating state shall be calculated according to
Formula (7-8);
Wp
Ap = (7-8)
[ ]bt
c) The required bolt area Am shall be taken as the larger value between Aa and Ap.
d) The actual bolt area Ab shall not be less than the required bolt area Am.
e) The minimum bolt sectional area shall be calculated respectively according to the minor
diameter of the screw thread and the minimum diameter of the part without thread.
7.5.2.4 Design load of bolt
The design load of bolt shall be determined according to the requirements below:
a) The design load of bolt under pre-tightening state shall be calculated according to Formula
(7-9):
Am + Ab
W= [ ]b (7-9)
2
b) The design load of bolt under operating state shall be calculated according to Formula
(7-10):
W=Wp (7-10)
7.5.3 Flange
7.5.3.1 Flange moment
The flange moment shall be calculated according to the requirements below:
a) The flange moment under pre-tightening state shall be calculated according to Formula (7-11):
Am + Ab
Ma = [ ]b LG (7-11)
2
120
b) Calculation for the flange moment operating state:
The axial force FD caused by the internal pressure applied on the cross section of flange internal
diameter shall be calculated according to Formula (7-12):
FD=0.785 Di2 pc (7-12)
The difference FT between the gross axial force F caused by internal pressure and the axial force
FD on the cross section of internal diameter shall be calculated according to Formula (7-13):
FT=FFD (7-13)
The moment of flange forces shall be calculated according to Formula (7-14):
Mp=FDLD+FTLT+FGLG (7-14)
Where LD, LT and LG shall be calculated according to Table 7-4;
Table 7-4 Moment Arm of Flange Moment mm
LD LT LG
Integral flange: c), d), e), f), g) in Figure 7-1; optional type flange: h), i), LA + 1 + LG Db DG
LA+0.51
j), k) in Figure 7-1 (when calculated according to integral flange) 2 2
Loose type flange: b-1), b-2) in Figure 7-1; optional type flange: h), i), j), Db Di LD + LG Db DG
k) in Figure 7-1 (when calculated according to lap joint flange) 2 2 2
Db Di Db DG Db DG
Lap joint flange: a-1), a-2) in Figure 7-1
2 2 2
7.5.3.2 Design moment of flange
The design moment of flange shall be taken as the larger value according to formula (7-15):
[ ]ft
M a
M o = [ ]f (7-15)
M
p
7.5.3.3 Flange stress
7.5.3.3.1 As for integral flange, loose type flange with neck and optional type flange calculated
according to integral flange, their stress shall be calculated according to the requirements below:
a) The axial stress shall be calculated according to Formula (7-16):
fM o
H = (7-16)
12 Di
f e + 1 f3
Where = +
T d1
FI
e=
ho
121
ho = Di 0
U
d1 = ho 02
VI
Where Di<201, replace Di with Di1;
As for loose type flange with neck and integral flange where f<1, Di1=Di+1; as for integral
flange where f1, Di1=Di+0;
The coefficient T and U shall be determined by looking up Figure 7-8 or Table 7-9 according to
parameter K, or calculated according to the formula given in Figure 7-8;
The integral flange coefficient FI shall be determined by looking up Table 7-8 or Figure 7-3, or
calculated according to those specified in Table 7-7;
The integral flange coefficient VI shall be determined by looking up Table 7-8 or Figure 7-4, or
calculated according to those specified in Table 7-7;
The correction coefficient of the stress at the integral flange neck f shall be determined by
looking up Figure 7-7, or calculated according to those specified in Table 7-7, where f<1, take f=1.
b) The radial stress shall be calculated according to Formula (7-17):
(1.33 f e + 1) M o
R = (7-17)
f2 Di
c) The circumferential stress shall be calculated according to Formula (7-18):
YM o
T = Z R (7-18)
f2 Di
Where, the coefficient Y and Z shall be determined by looking up Figure 7-8 or Table 7-9 according to
parameter K, or calculated according to the formula given in Figure 7-8.
7.5.3.3.2 The circumferential stress of the lap joint flange and the optional type flange calculated
according to lap joint flange shall be calculated according to the requirement below:
Axial stress: H=0;
Radial stress: R=0;
The circumferential stress shall be calculated according to Formula (7-19):
YM o
T = (7-19)
f2 Di
Where, coefficient Y is the same as 7.5.3.3.1.
7.5.3.3.3 Cut stress
122
As for the lap joint flanges shown in a-1) and a-2) in Figure 7-1, the cut stress at flanged edge
and the weld of welded flange shown in b-1), b-2), g), h), i) and j) in Figure 7-1 shall be calculated.
a) Shear load W
1) The shear load W under pre-tightening state shall be calculated according to Formula
(7-9):
2) The shear load W under operating state shall be calculated according to Formula (7-10):
b) Shearing area
1) Other flanges shown as (a-1) and a-2) in Figure 7-1 shall be calculated according to
Formula (7-20):
A=3.14Dil (7-20)
2) The flanges shall be calculated according to Formula (7-21):
A=3.14Dl (7-21)
Where AThe shearing area, mm2;
DThe calculated diameter of shear plane, taken as cylinder external diameter, mm;
lThe calculated height of shear plane, see Figure 7-1 for dimension, mm.
c) Cut stress
Cut stress shall be calculated respectively according to Formula (7-22) under both pre-tightening
and operating states:
W
= (7-22)
A
The stress checking shall meet the requirements below:
a) Axial stress
1) For the integral flanges shown as d), e) and f) in Figure 7-1:
Hmin(1.5[] ft , 2.5[] nt )
2) For the optional flanges calculated according to integral flange and the integral flanges
shown as g) in Figure 7-1:
Hmin(1.5[] ft , 1.5[] nt )
3) For integral flanges shown as c) in Figure 7-1 and loose type flanges with neck shown
as b-1) and b-2) in Figure7-1:
H1.5[] ft
123
b) Radial stress
R[] ft
c) Circumferential stress
T[] ft
d) Combined stress
(H+R)/2[] ft
(H+T)/2[] ft
e) Cut stress
The shear stresses under pre-tightening and operating states shall be less than or equal to 0.8
times of the allowable stresses of flanged edge (or cone) material at room temperature and design
temperature respectively.
7.5.3.5 Checking for flange stiffness
If the flange had been used successfully under an identical operating state, the stiffness checking
may be omitted. Otherwise:
As for the integral flange and the optional flange calculated according to integral flange, their
stiffness index shall be calculated according to Formula (7-23):
52.14V1M o
J= (7-23)
E p2 K I ho
Where K1The stiffness coefficient, taken as 0.3;
EThe elasticity modulus of flange materials, MPa; where the flange design moment
Mo is under pre-tightening control, E adopts the elasticity modulus at the normal
temperature; where the flange design moment Mo is under operating control, it adopts
that at the design temperature;
See 7.5.3.3.1 for other coefficients.
Checking condition: stiffness index shall meet: J1.
7.5.4 Flange under external pressure
The flange under external pressure may be calculated according to the flange under internal
pressure, the bolt area shall be calculated only under pre-tightening state according to Formula (7-7).
In addition, the flange moment under operating state shall be determined according to Formula (7-24):
Mp=FD(LDLG)+FT(LTLG) (7-24)
The external pressure shall be taken as a positive value when calculating, MPa.
124
During operating on flange, if it is respectively under internal pressure and external pressure, the
flange shall be designed according to these two pressures individually and the corresponding requirements
shall be met simultaneously.
1 / 0
Figure 7-3 Diagram for Value of FI
1 / 0
Figure 7-4 Diagram for Value of VI
125
1 / 0 h
=
h 1 / 0
h0 Di 0
Figure 7-5 Diagram for Value of FL Figure 7-6 Diagram for Value of VL
1 / 0
Figure 7-7 Diagram for Value of f

126
K 2 (1 + 8.55246 log K ) 1 K 2 (1 + 8.55246 log K ) 1
Note : T = U=
(1.04720 + 1.9448K 2 )( K 1) 1.36136( K 2 1)( K 1)
1 K 2 log K K 2 +1 K=Do/D1
Y= 0.66845 + 5.71690 Z=
K 1 K 2 1 K 2 1
Figure 7-8 Diagram for Value of T, U, Y and Z
7.6 Counter Flange
7.6.1 This calculation method is applicable to the counter flange where Kr2. The gasket shall be
designed according to those specified in 7.5.1, and the bolt shall be designed according to those
specified in 7.5.2, the calculation of the flange moment and flange stress shall be carried out
according to 7.6.3 and 7.6.4. Symbols adopted in this Article are in accordance with those specified in
7.3, except 7.6.2.
7.6.2 Symbols
DiThe internal diameter of the small end on the counter flange neck, mm;
DfThe internal diameter of the counter flange ring, mm;
DoThe external diameter of the counter flange ring, mm;
drThe parameter, mm3;
erThe parameter, mm 1;
FDThe axial force applied on the internal diameter section at small end of flange neck
caused by internal pressure, N;
127
FGThe compacting pressure of narrow face flange gasket, N;
FrThe coefficient;
FTThe difference between the total axial force caused by internal pressure and FD, N;
frThe coefficient;
horThe parameter, mm;
LDThe radial distance from the bolt center to the applying position of FD (see Figure 7-9), mm;
LGThe radial distance from the bolt center to the applying position of FG (see Figure 7-9), mm;
LTThe radial distance from the bolt center to the applying position of FT (see Figure 7-9), mm;
KrThe ratio of external diameter Do to internal diameter Df of counter flange;
TrThe coefficient;
UrThe coefficient;
VrThe coefficient;
YrThe coefficient;
rThe coefficient;
rThe coefficient;
HrThe axial stress at flange neck, MPa;
TrThe circumferential stress at flange external diameter, MPa;
RrThe radial stress at flange external diameter, MPa;
TrThe circumferential stress at flange internal diameter, MPa.
Figure 7-9 Counter Flange

128
7.6.3 Flange moment
7.6.3.1 The pre-tightening moment shall be calculated according to Formula (7-11), in which the
radial distance LG from the bolt center to the applying position of FG (see Figure 7-9) shall be calculated
LG=(DbDG)/2 (7-25)
7.6.3.2 The flange operation moment shall be calculated according to Formula (7-26):
Mp=|FDLD+FTLTFGLG| (7-26)
Where FD=0.785 Di2 Pc
FG=6.28DGbmpc
FT=0.785( Di2 DG2 )pc
LD=(DoDb1)/2
D + DG
LT = Db i /2
2
Where the value of LT is native, it means that FT, the diameter of action circle, is greater than Db,
the diameter of bolt center circle, and moment FTLT is native.
7.6.3.3 The design moment of flange shall be taken as the larger value according to Formula (7-27):
M p

M o = [ ]ft (7-27)
M a [ ]
f
7.6.4 Flange stress
The flange stress shall be calculated according to the requirements below:
a) The axial stress at flange neck shall be calculated according to Formula (7-28):
fr M o
Hr = (7-28)
r12 Df
f er + 1 f3
Where r = +
Tr dr
er = Fr / hor
hor = Do 0
129
d r = U r hor 02 / Vr
Ur= rU
0.668( K r + 1) 1
r = 1 + K 2
Y r
Do
Kr =
Df
Z + 0.3
Tr = rT
Z 0.3
For coefficient Fr, which use hor to replace ho, it is the value of FI which is determined by looking
up Table 7-3 or Figure 7-8, or calculated according to those specified in Table 7-7;
For coefficient Vr, which use hor to replace ho, it is the value of VI which is determined by looking
up Table 7-4 or Figure 7-8, or calculated according to those specified in Table 7-7;
For coefficient fr, which use hor to replace ho, it is the value of f which is determined by looking
up Figure 7-7, or calculated according to those specified in Table 7-7, where fr<1, take fr=1;
For coefficient T, U, Y and Z, which use Kr to replace K, shall be determined by looking up

Figure 7-8 (or calculated according to the formula shown in the figures) or Table 7-9.
b) The radial stress at the flange external diameter shall be calculated according to Formula
(7-29):
(1.33 f er + 1) M o
Rr = (7-29)
r f2 Df
c) The circumferential stress at the flange external diameter shall be calculated according to
Formula (7-30):
Yr M o 0.67 f er + 1
Tr = Z Rr (7-30)
f Df
2
1.33 f er + 1
Where Yr= rY.
d) The circumferential stress at the flange internal diameter shall be calculated according to
Formula (7-31):
2 e
2 K r2 f r + 1
M
Tr = 2 o Y 3 (7-31)
f Df ( K r 1)r
2
130
7.6.5 Stress checking
Hr, Rr, Tt shall be in accordance with those corresponding provisions in 7.5.3.4, Tr

[] ft .
7.7 Cylindrical End
7.7.1 Symbols
aThe height of mother nut, mm;
C2The corrosion allowance, mm;
DThe circumcircle diameter of the mother nut, mm;
DoThe external diameter of end, mm;
doThe diameter of the threadless part of the king bolt, mm;
HgThe total height of the cylindrical end, mm;
hThe outer edge length of the cylindrical end, mm;
hsThe depth of the bolt hole, mm;
LThe straight flange length of the cylindrical end, mm;
rThe corner radius at the transition area, mm;
The inclination (see Figure 7-11), ();
nThe thickness of the cylindrical end, mm;
mThe bending stress at the longitudinal cross section of the cylindrical end, MPa.
Other symbols see 7.3.
7.7.2 King bolt
The diameter do of the threadless part of the king bolt shall be calculated according to Formula
(7-32):
4 Am
do (7-32)
3.14n
Where AmThe required bolt area shall be determined according to 7.5.2.3.
nThe bolt Quantity, which shall be an even number.
The minor diameter of the screw thread shall be greater than do, and it is recommended to adopt
fine threads which are M644, M804, M1054 and M1254. See Figure 7-10 for the structural type
for screwing in the screw thread.
7.7.3 Mother nut
The hardness of the mother nut shall be slightly less than that of the king bolt.
The height a of the mother nut shall be calculated according to Formula (7-33):
a=(1.0~1.1)dB (7-33)
131
Figure 7-10 Screwing-in End of King Bolt
The circumcircle diameter D of the mother nut shall be calculated according to Formula (7-34):
D=(1.70~1.75)dB (7-34)
7.7.4 Cylindrical end
7.7.4.1 Thickness of the end
The thickness of the end n (see Figure 7-11), shall not be less than the nominal thickness of the
cylinder determined according to the internal pressure.
Figure 7-11 Structure of the Cylindrical End
7.7.4.2 Structure of the end part
The structure of the cylindrical end may be determined according to the following requirements
(see Figure 7-11):
a) The diameter of the center circle of the king bolt shall be calculated according to Formula
(7-35):
DbD2+1.5dB (7-35)
b) The external diameter of the cylindrical end shall be calculated according to Formula (7-36):
DoDb+1.8dB (7-36)
c) The effective thread depth of the bolt hole shall be calculated according to Formula (7-37):
h1(1.3~1.5)dB (7-37)
132
d) The depth of the bolt hole:
hs is equal to h1 plus the ineffective thread length required by the processing technology of the
bolt hole, mm;
e) The round corner at the transition area r0.8n, mm;
f) The length of the straight flange L=50mm;
g) The outer edge length of the end h, mm;
Where =30, calculate according to Formula (7-38):
hhs+0.5dB (7-38)
Where a=45, calculate according to Formula (7-39):
hhs+dB (7-39)
7.7.4.3.1 The bending moment applied on the longitudinal cross section of the cylindrical end shall
be calculated according to Formula (7-40):
1 1 2
M= n C2 + Di FD Db DG F ( Db DG ) Fp pc Di H g J o (7-40)
6.28 3 3
Where JoThe parameter, Jo=JcHg/2, mm;
JcThe dimension, see Figure 7-12, mm.
7.7.4.3.2 The section modulus in bending for the longitudinal cross section of the cylindrical end
(see Figure 7-12) shall be calculated according to Formula (7-41):
Ic
Zg = (7-41)
Jc
Where I c = 2[ I1 + A1a12 + I s + As as2 ] , mm4;
A1 J1 + As J s
Jc = , mm;
A1 + As
A1 = hB , mm2;
( H g h)( e + B)
As = , mm2;
2
a1 = J1 J c , mm;
as = J c J s , mm;
133
( Do Di )
B= C2 , mm;
2
3Fa ( DaD b )
ma = , mm4;
3.14 Da h 2
( H g h) 3 ( e2 + 4 e B + B 2 )
Is = , mm4;
36( e + B)
h
J1 = H g , mm;
2
( H g h)( e + 2 B)
Js = , mm;
3( e + B)
e = n C2 , mm.
0Centroid at the calculated cross section of the cylinder end face;
0'Centroid at the rectangular part of the calculated cross section;
0"Centroid at the trapezoid part of the calculated cross section.
Figure 7-12 Calculating Chart of the Cylinder End
7.7.4.3.3 The bending stress at the longitudinal cross section of the cylindrical end shall be checked
M
m = [ ]ft (7-42)
Zg
134
7.8 Wide Contact Face Flange
7.8.1 This Article is applicable to wide contact face flange that adopt nonmetallic soft gasket whose
thickness is not less than 1.5 mm. (See Figure 7-13).
7.8.2 Symbols
bo The basic sealing width of gasket under pre-tightening state, mm;

b'The effective sealing width of gasket under pre-tightening state, mm;
2b"The effective sealing width of gasket under operating state, mm;
DG The diameter of the circle at the action center applied by the compacting pressure of
gasket, mm;
DThe external diameter of the gasket or the flange, take whichever is smaller, mm;
F'The total axial force caused by internal pressure, N;
Fa The minimum compacting pressure for the gasket required under pre-tightening state, N;
FT The difference between the total axial force caused by internal pressure F' and the axial
force caused by internal pressure applied to the cross section of flange internal diameter,
N;
Fp The minimum compacting pressure for the gasket required under operating state, N;
FRThe axial force acting on the outside of bolt center circle required for balancing the moment
generated by FD, Fp and FT , N;
See 7.3 for Other symbols.
Equivalent Equivalent
Figure 7-13 Wide Contact Face Flange

135
7.8.3 Gasket
The characteristic parameter of common soft gasket (m, y) shall be determined by looking up
Table 7-2.
7.8.3.1 Effective sealing width of gasket
The effective sealing width of gasket shall be calculated according to the requirements below:
a) The effective sealing width under pre-tightening state shall be calculated according to Formula
(7-44):
bo = D Db (7-43)
b = 4 bo (7-44)
b) The effective sealing width of gasket under operating state, 2b"=5mm.
7.8.3.2 The diameter of the circle at the action center applied by the compacting pressure of gasket
DG (see Figure 7-13) shall be calculated according to Formula (7-45):
DG = D (d b + 2b) (7-45)
7.8.3.3 Compacting pressure of gasket
The compacting pressure of gasket shall be calculated according to the requirements below:
a) The minimum compacting pressure for the gasket required under pre-tightening state shall
be calculated according to Formula (7-46):
Fa = 3.14 Dbby (7-46)
b) The minimum compacting pressure for gasket required under operating state shall be calculated
Fp = 6.28DG bmpc (7-47)
7.8.4 Bolt
7.8.4.1 Arrangement of bolt
The arrangement of bolt is generally determined according to the requirements below:
a) The minimum radial dimension L and Le of flange and the minimum spacing between bolts
A
)
L may be determined according to Table 7-3;
)
b) The maximum spacing between bolts L max should not exceed the calculated value of
Formula (7-48):
)
L max=3dB+2f (7-48)
136
7.8.4.2 Bolt load
The bolt load shall be calculated according to the requirements below:
a) The bolt load under pre-tightening state shall be calculated according to Formula (7-49):
Wa = Fa (7-49)
b) The bolt load under operating state shall be calculated according to Formula (7-50):
Wp= F + Fp +FR (7-50)
Where F'=0.785(Dbdb)2pc
FD LD + FpLp + FT LT
FR =
LR
FT = F FD
( Db + d b + 2b) Di
LT =
4
d b + 2b
Lp =
2
D ( Db + d b ) d b
LR = +
4 2
7.8.4.3 Bolt area
The required bolt area and the actual one shall be determined according to 7.5.2.3.
7.8.5 Flange
7.8.5.1 Flange moment
The flange moment shall be calculated according to Formula (7-51):
M o = FR LR (7-51)
7.8.5.2 Flange thickness
The flange thickness shall be determined according to Formula (7-52):
6M o
f = (7-52)
[ ] (3.14 Db nd b )
t
f
137
Table 7-5 Calculation Sheet of Integral Flange
Calculating pressure pc MPa N mm

(Gasket sketch) Where bo6.4 mm,
Design temperature t bo mm
b=bo
Flange material Shape of flange impaction b mm
Where bo>6.4 mm,
Bolt material surface y MPa
b = 2.53 bo
Corrosion allowance C2 mm External diameter of gasket m
Bolt allowable Design temperature [ ]bt MPa Wa=3.14bDGy= N
stress Ambient temperature []b MPa Fp=6.28bDGmpc= N
Flange allowable Design temperature [ ] t

f MPa F=0.785 D pc= 2
G
N Fp+F= N
stress Ambient temperature []f MPa Am=max (Wa/[]b, (Fp+F)/ [ ]bt ) = mm2
Elasticity modulus of flange material E MPa Ab= mm2
Corrosion allowance is excluded for all dimensions W=(Am+Ab)[]b/2= N
Pre-tightening bolt condition
FG=W= N LG=(Db-DG)/2= mm Ma=FGLG= N mm
Operating condition
2
FD=0.785 D i c
p= N LD=LA+0.51= mm FDLD= N mm
FG=Fp= N LG=(Db-DG)/2= mm FGLG= N mm
FT=FFD= N LT=(LA+1+LG)/2= mm FTLT= N mm
Mp=FDLD+FGLG+FTLT= N mm
Mo=max{Mp, Ma [ ]ft /[]f}= Nmm
Shape constant
ho = Di 0 = h/ho=
K=Do/Di= 1/0=
T= Looking up Figure 7-3 FI=
Looking up Z= Looking up Figure 7-4 VI=
Table 7-9 Y= Looking up Figure 7-7 f=
U= e=F1/ho=
d1=(U/V1)ho 02 =
f (supposed)= mm
=fe+1
=1.33fe+1
r= /T
= f3 /d1
Allowable value Allowable value
=+
1.5 [ ] or 2.5 [ ]
t
f
t
n
Axial stress H=f/Mo/( Di)
1
2
MPa
[ ]ft Radial stress R=/Mo/( f2 Di) MPa
[ ] t
f
Tangential stress T=YMo/( D1)ZR
f
2
MPa
[ ]ft max {(H+T)/2, (H+R)/2} MPa
Stiffness index Jl J=52.14VIMo/(E K1ho)

2
0
Note: As for the loose type flange with neck, the coefficients VI and FI shall be replaced by VL and FL. Take f as 1.0.
138
Table 7-6 Calculation Sheet of Lap Joint Flange
Calculating pressure pc MPa N mm

(Gasket sketch) Where bo6.4 mm,
Design temperature t bo mm
b=bo
Flange material Shape of flange impaction b mm
Where bo>6.4 mm,
surface
Bolt material b = 2.53 bo y MPa
External diameter of gasket
Corrosion allowance C2 mm Wa=3.14bDGy= N m
Bolt allowable Design temperature [ ]bt MPa Fp=6.28bDGmpc= N

2
F=0.785 D pc= N
stress Ambient temperature []b MPa G Fp+F= N
Flange allowable Design temperature [ ]ft MPa Am=max(Wa/[]b, (Fp+F)/ [ ]bt )= mm2
stress Ambient temperature []f MPa Ab= mm2
Corrosion allowance is excluded for all dimensions W=(Am+Ab)[]b/2= N
Pre-tightening bolt condition
FG=W= N LG=(DbDG)/2= mm Ma=FGLG= N mm
Operating condition
FD=0.785 Di2 pc= N LD=(DbDi)/2= mm FDLD= N mm
FG=Fp= N LG=(DbDG)/2= mm FGLG= N mm
FT=FFD= N LT=(LD+LG)/2= mm FTLT= N mm
Mp=FDLD+FGLG+FTLT= N mm
Mo=max{Mp, Ma [ ] /[]f}= t
f
N mm
Shape constant: K=Do/Di=

Y=
Flange thickness:
f = YM o /([ ]ft Di )
Take the center of the contact surface between flange and
flanged edge, being independent to gasket position = mm
a) b)
Note: For the flange shown as a) in this Figure, LG=LT=(DbDG)/2.
Table 7-8 Formula for Flange Coefficient FI, VI, f, FL and VL
Integral flange Loose type flange with neck
E
FI = 6
(1 + A) 3 1 A 1 11A 1 A 1 A
1/ 4
C C18 + + C21 +
+ C24 + +
2.73 C FL = 2 6 4 84 70 105 40 72
C (1 + A)
1/ 4 3

E 2.73 C
VI = 1/ 4
4
2.73
(1 + A) 3 1 C24 3C 21
C C18
VL = 4 5 1/ 4 2
2.73
f=C36/(1+A). 0 (1 + A)
3
C
Where 1=0,
f=1
FI=0.908920, VI=0.550103, f=1
139
Integral flange Loose type flange with neck
The coefficients in the formulae above:
(1) A=(1/0)1 (2) C=43.68 (h/ho)4 (3) C1=1/3+A/12
(4) C2=5/42+17A/336 (5) C3=1/210+A/360 (6) C4=11/360+59A/5040+(1+3A)/C
(7) C5=1/90+5A/1008(1+A)3/C (8) C6=1/120+17A/5040+1/C
(9) C7=215/2772+51A/1232+(60/7+225A/14+75A2/7+5A3/2)/C
(10) C8=31/6930+128A/45045+(6/7+15A/7+12A2/7+5A3/11)/C
(11) C9=533/30240+653A/73920+(1/2+33A/14+39A2/28+25A3/84)/C
(12) C10=29/3780+3A/704(1/2+33A/14+81A2/28+13A3/12)/C
(13) C11=31/6048+1763A/665280+(1/2+6A/7+15A2/28+5A3/42)/C
(14) C12=1/2925+71A/300300+(8/35+18A/35+156A2/385+6A3/55)/C
(15) C13=761/831600+937A/1663200+(1/35+6A/35+11A2/70+3A3/70)/C
(16) C14=197/415800+103A/332640(1/35+6A/35+17A2/70+A3/10)/C
(17) C15=233/831600+97A/554400+(1/35+3A/35+A2/14+2A3/105)/C
(18) C16=C1C7C12+C2C8C3+C3C8C2( c32 C7+ c82 C1+ c22 C12)
(19) C17=[C4C7C12+C2C8C13+C3C8C9(C13C7C3+ c82 C4+C12C2C9)]/C16
(22) C20=[C1C9C12+C4C8C3+C3C13C2( c32 C9+C13C8C1+C12C4C2)]/C16
(25) C23=[C1C7C13+C2C9C3+C4C8C2(C3C7C4+C8C9C1+ c22 C13)]/C16
(28) C26=(C/4)1/4 (29) C27=C20C175/12+C17C26 (30) C28=C22C191/12+C19C26
(31) C29=(C/4)1/2 (32) C30=(C/4)3/4 (33) C31=3A/2C17C30
(34) C32=1/2C19C30 (35) C33=0.5C26C32+C28C31C29(0.5C30C28+C32C27C29)
(36) C34=1/12+C18C21C18C26 (37) C35=C18C30 (38) C36=(C28C35C29C32C34C29)/C33
(39) C37=[0.5C26C35+C34C31C29(0.5C30C34+C35C27C29)]/C33 (40) E1=C17C36+C18+C19C37
(41) E2=C20C36+C21+C22C37 (42) E3=C23C36+C24+C25C37 (43) E4=1/4+C37/12+C36/4E3/53E2/2E1
(44) E5=E1 (1/2+A/6)+E2(1/4+11A/84)+E3(1/70+A/105)
(45) E6=E5C36(7/120+A/36+3A/C)1/40A/72C37 (1/60+A/120+1/C)
140
Table 7-8 Coefficient FI and VI
1/0 h/h0 F1 V1 1/0 h/h0 F1 V1
1.00 0.01 0.908 92 0.550 10 2.50 0.06 0.907 45 0.470 37
1.00 0.02 0.908 92 0.550 10 2.50 0.07 0.906 88 0.458 48
1.00 0.03 0.908 92 0.550 10 2.50 0.08 0.906 20 0.446 96
1.00 0.04 0.908 92 0.550 10 2.50 0.09 0.905 43 0.435 80
1.00 0.05 0.908 92 0.550 10 2.50 0.10 0.904 55 0.424 99
1.00 0.06 0.908 92 0.550 10
1.00 0.07 0.908 92 0.550 10 3.00 0.01 0.908 91 0.534 43
1.00 0.08 0.908 92 0.550 10 3.00 0.02 0.908 86 0.519 26
1.00 0.09 0.908 92 0.550 10 3.00 0.03 0.908 77 0.504 57
1.00 0.10 0.908 92 0.550 10 3.00 0.04 0.908 61 0.490 35
3.00 0.05 0.908 38 0.476 59
1.50 0.01 0.908 87 0.541 33 3.00 0.06 0.908 07 0.463 27
1.50 0.02 0.908 72 0.532 80 3.00 0.07 0.907 67 0.450 37
1.50 0.03 0.908 48 0.524 49 3.00 0.08 0.907 17 0.437 90
1.50 0.04 0.908 15 0.516 42 3.00 0.09 0.906 58 0.425 83
1.50 0.05 0.907 74 0.508 57 3.00 0.10 0.905 88 0.414 15
1.50 0.06 0.907 24 0.500 93
1.50 0.07 0.906 66 0.493 51 3.50 0.01 0.908 94 0.533 41
1.50 0.08 0.906 00 0.486 29 3.50 0.02 0.908 97 0.517 27
1.50 0.09 0.905 27 0.479 27 3.50 0.03 0.908 99 0.501 66
1.50 0.10 0.904 47 0.472 45 3.50 0.04 0.908 98 0.486 56
3.50 0.05 0.908 92 0.471 96
2.00 0.01 0.908 87 0.537 74 3.50 0.06 0.908 80 0.457 85
2.00 0.02 0.908 71 0.525 73 3.50 0.07 0.908 60 0.444 21
2.00 0.03 0.908 46 0.514 08 3.50 0.08 0.908 32 0.431 03
2.00 0.04 0.908 09 0.502 76 3.50 0.09 0.907 94 0.418 29
2.00 0.05 0.907 63 0.491 78 3.50 0.10 0.907 45 0.405 97
2.00 0.06 0.907 06 0.481 12
2.00 0.07 0.906 40 0.470 78 4.00 0.01 0.908 97 0.532 55
2.00 0.08 0.905 63 0.460 74 4.00 0.02 0.909 08 0.515 58
2.00 0.09 0.904 77 0.451 01 4.00 0.03 0.909 22 0.499 20
2.00 0.10 0.903 82 0.441 56 4.00 0.04 0.909 37 0.483 37
4.00 0.05 0.909 50 0.468 08
2.50 0.01 0.908 88 0.535 76 4.00 0.06 0.909 58 0.453 31
2.50 0.02 0.908 77 0.521 85 4.00 0.07 0.909 60 0.439 06
2.50 0.03 0.908 58 0.508 37 4.00 0.08 0.909 54 0.425 29
2.50 0.04 0.908 30 0.495 31 4.00 0.09 0.909 39 0.412 00
2.50 0.05 0.907 92 0.482 65 4.00 0.10 0.909 14 0.399 17
141
1/0 h/h0 F1 V1 1/0 h/h0 F1 V1
4.50 0.01 0.909 00 0.531 77 5.00 0.01 0.909 03 0.531 03
4.50 0.02 0.909 19 0.514 07 5.00 0.02 0.909 31 0.512 65
4.50 0.03 0.909 47 0.496 99 5.00 0.03 0.909 71 0.494 92
4.50 0.04 0.909 78 0.480 50 5.00 0.04 0.910 19 0.477 83
4.50 0.05 0.910 09 0.464 60 5.00 0.05 0.910 69 0.461 35
4.50 0.06 0.910 38 0.449 25 5.00 0.06 0.911 19 0.445 47
4.50 0.07 0.910 62 0.434 45 5.00 0.07 0.911 64 0.430 17
4.50 0.08 0.910 79 0.420 17 5.00 0.08 0.912 04 0.415 42
4.50 0.09 0.910 87 0.406 40 5.00 0.09 0.912 34 0.401 21
4.50 0.10 0.910 84 0.393 12 5.00 0.10 0.912 54 0.387 52
Table 7-9 Coefficients K, T, Z, Y and U
K T Z Y U K T Z y U
1.001 1.91 1 000.50 1 899.43 2 078.85 1.027 1.90 37.54 77.97 79.08
1.002 1.91 500.50 951.81 1 052.80 1.028 1.90 36.22 69.43 76.30
1.003 1.91 333.83 637.56 700.80 1.029 1.90 34.99 67.11 73.75
1.004 1.91 250.50 478.04 525.45 1.030 1.90 33.84 64.91 71.33
1.005 1.91 200.50 383.67 421.72 1.031 1.90 32.76 62.85 69.06
1.006 1.91 167.17 319.71 351.42 1.032 1.90 31.76 60.92 66.94
1.007 1.91 143.36 274.11 301.30 1.033 1.90 30.81 59.11 63.95
1.008 1.91 125.50 239.95 263.75 1.034 1.90 29.92 57.41 63.08
1.009 1.91 111.61 213.40 234.42 1.035 1.90 29.08 55.80 61.32
1.010 1.91 100.50 192.19 211.19 1.036 1.90 28.29 54.29 59.66
1.011 1.91 91.41 174.83 192.13 1.037 1.90 27.54 52.85 58.08
1.012 1.91 83.84 160.38 176.25 1.038 1.90 26.83 51.50 56.59
1.013 1.91 77.43 148.06 162.81 1.039 1.90 26.15 50.21 55.17
1.014 1.91 71.93 137.69 151.30 1.040 1.90 25.51 48.97 53.82
1.015 1.91 67.17 128.61 141.33 1.041 1.90 24.90 47.81 53.10
1.016 1.90 63.00 120.56 132.49 1.042 1.90 24.32 46.71 51.33
1.017 1.90 59.33 111.98 124.81 1.043 1.90 23.77 45.64 50.15
1.018 1.90 56.06 107.36 118.00 1.044 1.90 23.23 44.64 49.05
1.019 1.90 53.14 101.72 111.78 1.045 1.90 22.74 43.69 48.02
1.020 1.90 50.51 96.73 106.30 1.046 1.90 22.05 42.75 46.99
1.021 1.90 48.12 92.21 101.33 1.047 1.90 21.79 41.87 46.03
1.022 1.90 45.96 88.04 96.75 1.048 1.90 21.35 41.02 45.09
1.023 1.90 43.98 84.30 92.64 1.049 1.90 20.92 40.21 44.21
1.024 1.90 42.17 80.81 88.81 1.050 1.89 20.51 39.43 43.34
1.025 1.90 40.51 77.61 85.29 1.051 1.89 20.12 38.68 42.51
1.026 1.90 38.97 74.70 82.09 1.052 1.89 19.74 37.96 41.73
142
K T Z Y U K T Z y U
1.053 1.89 19.38 37.27 40.69 1.092 1.88 11.40 21.99 24.16
1.054 1.89 19.03 36.60 40.23 1.093 1.88 11.28 21.76 23.91
1.055 1.89 18.69 35.96 39.64 1.094 1.88 11.16 21.54 23.67
1.056 1.89 18.38 35.34 38.84 1.095 1.88 11.05 21.32 23.44
1.057 1.89 18.06 34.74 38.19 1.096 1.88 10.94 21.11 23.20
1.058 1.89 17.76 34.17 37.56 1.097 1.88 10.83 20.91 22.97
1.059 1.89 17.47 33.92 36.95 1.098 1.88 10.73 20.71 22.75
1.060 1.89 17.18 33.64 36.34 1.099 1.88 10.62 20.51 22.39
1.061 1.89 16.91 32.55 35.78 1.100 1.88 10.52 20.31 22.18
1.062 1.89 16.64 32.04 35.21 1.101 1.88 10.43 20.15 22.12
1.063 1.89 16.40 31.55 34.68 1.102 1.88 10.33 19.94 21.92
1.064 1.89 16.15 31.08 34.17 1.103 1.88 10.23 19.76 21.72
1.065 1.89 15.90 30.61 33.65 1.104 1.88 10.14 19.58 21.52
1.066 1.89 15.67 30.17 33.17 1.105 1.88 10.05 19.38 21.30
1.067 1.89 15.45 29.74 32.69 1.106 1.88 9.96 19.33 21.14
1.068 1.89 15.22 29.32 32.22 1.107 1.87 9.87 19.07 20.96
1.069 1.89 15.02 28.91 31.79 1.108 1.87 9.78 18.90 20.77
1.070 1.89 14.80 28.51 31.34 1.109 1.87 9.70 18.74 20.59
1.071 1.89 14.61 28.13 30.92 1.110 1.87 9.62 18.55 20.38
1.072 1.89 14.41 27.76 30.51 1.111 1.87 9.54 18.42 20.25
1.073 1.89 14.22 27.39 30.11 1.112 1.87 9.46 18.27 20.08
1.074 1.88 14.04 27.04 29.72 1.113 1.87 9.38 18.13 19.91
1.075 1.88 13.85 26.69 29.34 1.114 1.87 9.30 17.97 19.75
1.076 1.88 13.68 26.36 28.96 1.115 1.87 9.22 17.81 19.55
1.077 1.88 13.56 26.03 28.69 1.116 1.87 9.15 17.68 19.43
1.078 1.88 13.35 25.72 28.27 1.117 1.87 9.07 17.54 19.27
1.079 1.88 13.18 25.40 27.92 1.118 1.87 9.00 17.40 19.12
1.080 1.88 13.02 25.10 27.59 1.119 1.87 8.94 17.27 18.98
1.081 1.88 12.87 24.81 27.27 1.120 1.87 8.86 17.13 18.80
1.082 1.88 12.72 24.52 26.95 1.121 1.87 8.79 17.00 18.68
1.083 1.88 12.57 24.24 26.65 1.122 1.87 8.72 16.87 18.54
1.084 1.88 12.43 24.00 26.34 1.123 1.87 8.66 16.74 18.40
1.085 1.88 12.29 23.69 26.05 1.124 1.87 8.59 16.62 18.26
1.086 1.88 12.15 23.44 25.57 1.125 1.87 8.53 16.49 18.11
1.087 1.88 12.02 23.18 25.48 1.126 1.87 8.47 16.37 17.99
1.088 1.88 11.89 22.93 25.02 1.127 1.87 8.40 16.25 17.86
1.089 1.88 11.76 22.68 24.93 1.128 1.87 8.34 16.14 17.73
1.090 1.88 11.63 22.44 24.66 1.129 1.87 8.28 16.02 17.60
1.091 1.88 11.52 22.22 24.41 1.130 1.87 8.22 15.91 17.48
143
K T Z Y U K T Z Y U
1.131 1.87 8.16 15.79 17.35 1.170 1.85 6.42 12.43 13.66
1.132 1.87 8.11 15.68 17.24 1.171 1.85 6.39 12.38 13.60
1.133 1.86 8.05 15.57 17.11 1.172 1.85 6.35 12.31 13.53
1.134 1.86 7.99 15.46 16.99 1.173 1.85 6.32 12.25 13.46
1.135 1.86 7.94 15.36 16.90 1.174 1.85 6.29 12.18 13.39
1.136 1.86 7.88 15.26 16.77 1.175 1.85 6.25 12.10 13.30
1.137 1.86 7.83 15.15 16.65 1.176 1.85 6.22 12.06 13.25
1.138 1.86 7.78 15.05 16.54 1.177 1.85 6.19 12.00 13.18
1.139 1.86 7.73 14.95 16.43 1.178 1.85 6.16 11.93 13.11
1.140 1.86 7.68 14.86 16.35 1.179 1.85 6.13 11.87 13.05
1.141 1.86 7.62 14.76 16.22 1.180 1.85 6.10 11.79 12.96
1.142 1.86 7.57 14.66 16.11 1.181 1.85 6.07 11.76 12.92
1.143 1.86 7.53 14.57 16.01 1.182 1.85 6.04 11.70 12.86
1.144 1.86 7.48 14.48 15.91 1.183 1.85 6.01 11.64 12.79
1.145 1.86 7.43 14.39 15.83 1.184 1.85 5.98 11.58 12.73
1.146 1.86 7.38 14.29 15.71 1.185 1.85 5.95 11.50 12.64
1.147 1.86 7.34 14.20 15.61 1.186 1.85 5.92 11.47 12.61
1.148 1.86 7.29 14.12 15.51 1.187 1.85 5.89 11.42 12.54
1.149 1.86 7.25 14.03 15.42 1.188 1.85 5.86 11.36 12.49
1.150 1.86 7.20 13.95 15.34 1.189 1.85 5.83 11.31 12.43
1.151 1.86 7.16 13.86 15.23 1.190 1.84 5.81 11.26 12.37
1.152 1.86 7.11 13.77 15.14 1.191 1.84 5.78 11.20 12.31
1.153 1.86 7.07 13.69 15.05 1.192 1.84 5.75 11.15 12.25
1.154 1.86 7.03 13.61 14.96 1.193 1.84 5.73 11.10 12.20
1.155 1.86 6.99 13.54 14.87 1.194 1.84 5.70 11.05 12.14
1.156 1.86 6.95 13.45 14.78 1.195 1.84 5.67 11.00 12.08
1.157 1.86 6.91 13.37 14.70 1.196 1.84 5.65 10.95 12.03
1.158 1.86 6.87 13.30 14.61 1.197 1.84 5.62 10.90 11.97
1.159 1.86 6.83 13.22 14.53 1.198 1.84 5.60 10.85 11.92
1.160 1.86 6.79 13.15 14.45 1.199 1.84 5.57 10.80 11.87
1.161 1.85 6.75 13.07 14.36 1.200 1.84 5.55 10.75 11.81
1.162 1.85 6.71 13.00 14.28 1.201 1.84 5.52 10.70 11.76
1.163 1.85 6.67 12.92 14.20 1.202 1.84 5.50 10.65 11.71
1.164 1.85 6.64 12.85 14.12 1.203 1.84 5.47 10.61 11.66
1.165 1.85 6.60 12.78 14.04 1.204 1.84 5.45 10.56 11.61
1.166 1.85 6.56 12.71 13.97 1.205 1.84 5.42 10.52 11.56
1.167 1.85 6.53 12.64 13.89 1.206 1.84 5.40 10.47 11.51
1.168 1.85 6.49 12.58 13.82 1.207 1.84 5.38 10.43 11.46
1.169 1.85 6.46 12.51 13.74 1.208 1.84 5.35 10.38 11.41
144
K T Z Y U K T Z Y U
1.209 1.84 5.33 10.34 11.36 1.248 1.82 4.59 8.89 9.77
1.210 1.84 5.31 10.30 11.32 1.249 1.82 4.57 8.86 9.74
1.211 1.83 5.29 10.25 11.27 1.250 1.82 4.56 8.83 9.70
1.212 1.83 5.27 10.21 11.22 1.251 1.82 4.54 8.80 9.67
1.213 1.83 5.24 10.16 11.17 1.252 1.82 4.52 8.77 9.64
1.214 1.83 5.22 10.12 11.12 1.253 1.82 4.51 8.74 9.60
1.215 1.83 5.20 10.09 11.09 1.254 1.82 4.49 8.71 9.57
1.216 1.83 5.18 10.04 11.03 1.255 1.82 4.48 8.68 9.54
1.217 1.83 5.16 10.00 10.99 1.256 1.82 4.46 8.65 9.51
1.218 1.83 5.14 9.96 10.94 1.257 1.82 4.45 8.62 9.47
1.219 1.83 5.12 9.92 10.90 1.258 1.81 4.43 8.59 9.44
1.220 1.83 5.10 9.89 10.87 1.259 1.81 4.42 8.56 9.41
1.221 1.83 5.07 9.84 10.81 1.260 1.81 4.40 8.53 9.38
1.222 1.83 5.05 9.80 10.77 1.261 1.81 4.39 8.51 9.35
1.223 1.83 5.03 9.76 10.73 1.262 1.81 4.37 8.49 9.32
1.224 1.83 5.01 9.72 10.68 1.263 1.81 4.36 8.45 9.28
1.225 1.83 5.00 9.69 10.65 1.264 1.81 4.35 8.42 9.25
1.226 1.83 4.98 9.65 10.60 1.265 1.81 4.33 8.39 9.23
1.227 1.83 4.96 9.61 10.56 1.266 1.81 4.32 8.37 9.19
1.228 1.83 4.94 9.57 10.52 1.267 1.81 4.30 8.34 9.16
1.229 1.83 4.92 9.53 10.48 1.268 1.81 4.29 8.31 9.14
1.230 1.83 4.90 9.50 10.44 1.269 1.81 4.28 8.29 9.11
1.231 1.83 4.88 9.46 10.40 1.270 1.81 4.26 8.26 9.08
1.232 1.83 4.86 9.43 10.36 1.271 1.81 4.25 8.23 9.05
1.233 1.83 4.84 9.39 10.32 1.272 1.81 4.24 8.21 9.02
1.234 1.83 4.83 9.36 10.28 1.273 1.81 4.22 8.18 8.99
1.235 1.83 4.81 9.32 10.24 1.274 1.81 4.21 8.15 8.96
1.236 1.82 4.79 9.29 10.20 1.275 1.81 4.20 8.13 8.93
1.237 1.82 4.77 9.25 10.17 1.276 1.81 4.18 8.11 8.91
1.238 1.82 4.76 9.22 10.13 1.277 1.81 4.17 8.08 8.88
1.239 1.82 4.74 9.18 10.09 1.278 1.81 4.16 8.05 8.85
1.240 1.82 4.72 9.15 10.05 1.279 1.81 4.15 8.03 8.82
1.241 1.82 4.70 9.12 10.02 1.280 1.81 4.13 8.01 8.79
1.242 1.82 4.69 9.08 9.98 1.281 1.81 4.12 7.98 8.77
1.243 1.82 4.67 9.05 9.95 1.282 1.81 4.11 7.96 8.74
1.244 1.82 4.65 9.02 9.91 1.283 1.80 4.10 7.93 8.71
1.245 1.82 4.64 8.99 9.87 1.284 1.80 4.08 7.91 8.69
1.246 1.82 4.62 8.95 9.84 1.285 1.80 4.07 7.89 8.66
1.247 1.82 4.60 8.92 9.81 1.286 1.80 4.06 7.86 8.64
145
K T Z Y U K T Z Y U
1.287 1.80 4.05 7.84 8.61 1.326 1.79 3.64 7.03 7.73
1.288 1.80 4.04 7.81 8.59 1.327 1.79 3.63 7.01 7.71
1.289 1.80 4.02 7.79 8.56 1.328 1.78 3.62 7.00 7.69
1.290 1.80 4.01 7.77 8.53 1.329 1.78 3.61 6.98 7.67
1.291 1.80 4.00 7.75 8.51 1.330 1.78 3.60 6.96 7.65
1.292 1.80 3.99 7.72 8.48 1.331 1.78 3.59 6.94 7.63
1.293 1.80 3.98 7.70 8.46 1.332 1.78 3.58 6.92 7.61
1.294 1.80 3.97 7.68 8.43 1.333 1.78 3.57 6.91 7.59
1.295 1.80 3.95 7.66 8.41 1.334 1.78 3.57 6.89 7.57
1.296 1.80 3.94 7.63 8.39 1.335 1.78 3.56 6.87 7.55
1.297 1.80 3.93 7.61 8.36 1.336 1.78 3.55 6.85 7.53
1.298 1.80 3.92 7.59 8.33 1.337 1.78 3.54 6.84 7.51
1.299 1.80 3.91 7.57 8.31 1.338 1.78 3.53 6.82 7.50
1.300 1.80 3.90 7.55 8.29 1.339 1.78 3.52 6.81 7.48
1.301 1.80 3.89 7.53 8.27 1.340 1.78 3.51 6.79 7.46
1.302 1.80 3.88 7.50 8.24 1.341 1.78 3.51 6.77 7.44
1.303 1.80 3.87 7.48 8.22 1.342 1.78 3.50 6.76 7.42
1.304 1.80 3.86 7.46 8.20 1.343 1.78 3.49 6.74 7.41
1.305 1.80 3.84 7.44 8.18 1.344 1.78 3.48 6.72 7.39
1.306 1.80 3.83 7.42 8.16 1.345 1.78 3.47 6.71 7.37
1.307 1.80 3.82 7.40 8.13 1.346 1.78 3.46 6.69 7.35
1.308 1.79 3.81 7.38 8.11 1.347 1.78 3.46 6.68 7.33
1.309 1.79 3.80 7.36 8.09 1.348 1.78 3.45 6.66 7.32
1.310 1.79 3.79 7.34 8.07 1.349 1.78 3.44 6.65 7.30
1.311 1.79 3.78 7.32 8.05 1.350 1.78 3.43 6.63 7.28
1.312 1.79 3.77 7.30 8.02 1.351 1.78 3.42 6.61 7.27
1.313 1.79 3.76 7.28 8.00 1.352 1.78 3.42 6.60 7.25
1.314 1.79 3.75 7.26 7.98 1.353 1.77 3.41 6.58 7.23
1.315 1.79 3.74 7.24 7.96 1.354 1.77 3.40 6.57 7.21
1.316 1.79 3.73 7.22 7.94 1.355 1.77 3.39 6.55 7.19
1.317 1.79 3.72 7.20 7.92 1.356 1.77 3.38 6.53 7.17
1.318 1.79 3.71 7.18 7.89 1.357 1.77 3.38 6.52 7.16
1.319 1.79 3.70 7.16 7.87 1.358 1.77 3.37 6.50 7.14
1.320 1.79 3.69 7.14 7.85 1.359 1.77 3.36 6.49 7.12
1.321 1.79 3.68 7.12 7.83 1.360 1.77 3.35 6.47 7.11
1.322 1.79 3.67 7.10 7.81 1.361 1.77 3.35 6.45 7.09
1.323 1.79 3.67 7.09 7.79 1.362 1.77 3.34 6.44 7.08
1.324 1.79 3.66 7.07 7.77 1.363 1.77 3.33 6.42 7.06
1.325 1.79 3.65 7.05 7.75 1.364 1.77 3.32 6.41 7.04
146
K T Z Y U K T Z Y U
1.365 1.77 3.32 6.39 7.03 1.404 1.75 3.06 5.89 6.46
1.366 1.77 3.31 6.38 7.01 1.405 1.75 3.05 5.88 6.45
1.367 1.77 3.30 6.37 7.00 1.406 1.75 3.05 5.87 6.44
1.368 1.77 3.30 6.35 6.98 1.407 1.75 3.04 5.86 6.43
1.369 1.77 3.29 6.34 6.97 1.408 1.75 3.04 5.84 6.41
1.370 1.77 3.28 6.32 6.95 1.409 1.75 3.03 5.83 6.40
1.371 1.77 3.27 6.31 6.93 1.410 1.75 3.02 5.82 6.39
1.372 1.77 3.27 6.30 6.91 1.411 1.75 3.02 5.81 6.38
1.373 1.77 3.26 6.28 6.90 1.412 1.75 3.01 5.80 6.37
1.374 1.77 3.25 6.27 6.89 1.413 1.75 3.01 5.78 6.35
1.375 1.77 3.25 6.25 6.87 1.414 1.75 3.00 5.77 6.34
1.376 1.77 3.24 6.24 6.86 1.415 1.75 3.00 5.76 6.33
1.377 1.77 3.23 6.22 6.84 1.416 1.75 2.99 5.75 6.32
1.378 1.77 3.22 6.21 6.82 1.417 1.75 2.98 5.74 6.31
1.379 1.77 3.22 6.19 6.81 1.418 1.75 2.98 5.72 6.29
1.380 1.77 3.21 6.18 6.80 1.419 1.75 2.97 5.71 6.28
1.381 1.76 3.20 6.17 6.79 1.420 1.75 2.97 5.70 6.27
1.382 1.76 3.20 6.16 6.77 1.421 1.75 2.96 5.69 6.26
1.383 1.76 3.19 6.14 6.75 1.422 1.75 2.96 5.68 6.25
1.384 1.76 3.18 6.13 6.74 1.423 1.75 2.95 5.67 6.23
1.385 1.76 3.18 6.12 6.73 1.424 1.74 2.95 5.66 6.22
1.386 1.76 3.17 6.11 6.72 1.425 1.74 2.94 5.65 6.21
1.387 1.76 3.16 6.10 6.70 1.426 1.74 2.94 5.64 6.20
1.388 1.76 3.16 6.08 6.68 1.427 1.74 2.93 5.63 6.19
1.389 1.76 3.15 6.07 6.67 1.428 1.74 2.92 5.62 6.17
1.390 1.76 3.15 6.06 6.66 1.429 1.74 2.92 5.61 6.16
1.391 1.76 3.14 6.05 6.64 1.430 1.74 2.91 5.60 6.15
1.392 1.76 3.13 6.04 6.63 1.431 1.74 2.91 5.59 6.14
1.393 1.76 3.13 6.02 6.61 1.432 1.74 2.90 5.58 6.13
1.394 1.76 3.12 6.01 6.60 1.433 1.74 2.90 5.57 6.11
1.395 1.76 3.11 6.00 6.59 1.434 1.74 2.89 5.56 6.10
1.396 1.76 3.11 5.99 6.58 1.435 1.74 2.89 5.55 6.09
1.397 1.76 3.10 5.98 6.56 1.436 1.74 2.88 5.54 6.08
1.398 1.75 3.10 5.96 6.55 1.437 1.74 2.88 5.53 6.07
1.399 1.75 3.09 5.95 6.53 1.438 1.74 2.87 5.52 6.05
1.400 1.75 3.08 5.94 6.52 1.439 1.74 2.87 5.51 6.04
1.401 1.75 3.08 5.93 6.50 1.440 1.74 2.86 5.50 6.03
1.402 1.75 3.07 5.92 6.49 1.441 1.74 2.86 5.49 6.02
1.403 1.75 3.07 5.90 6.47 1.442 1.74 2.85 5.48 6.01
147
K T Z Y U K T Z Y U
1.443 1.74 2.85 5.47 6.00 1.483 1.72 2.67 5.10 5.59
1.444 1.74 2.84 5.46 5.99 1.484 1.72 2.66 5.09 5.58
1.445 1.74 2.84 5.45 5.98 1.485 1.72 2.66 5.08 5.57
1.446 1.74 2.83 5.44 5.97 1.486 1.72 2.66 5.07 5.56
1.447 1.73 2.83 5.43 5.96 1.487 1.72 2.65 5.06 5.55
1.448 1.73 2.82 5.42 5.95 1.488 1.72 2.65 5.06 5.55
1.449 1.73 2.82 5.41 5.94 1.489 1.72 2.64 5.05 5.54
1.450 1.73 2.81 5.40 5.93 1.490 1.72 2.64 5.04 5.53
1.451 1.73 2.81 5.39 5.92 1.491 1.72 2.64 5.03 5.52
1.452 1.73 2.80 5.38 5.91 1.492 1.72 2.63 5.02 5.51
1.453 1.73 2.80 5.37 5.90 1.493 1.71 2.63 5.02 5.51
1.454 1.73 2.80 5.36 5.89 1.494 1.71 2.62 5.01 5.50
1.455 1.73 2.79 5.35 5.88 1.495 1.71 2.62 5.00 5.49
1.456 1.73 2.79 5.34 5.87 1.496 1.71 2.62 4.99 5.48
1.457 1.73 2.78 5.33 5.86 1.497 1.71 2.61 4.98 5.47
1.458 1.73 2.78 5.32 5.85 1.498 1.71 2.61 4.98 5.47
1.459 1.73 2.77 5.31 5.84 1.499 1.71 2.60 4.97 5.46
1.460 1.73 2.77 5.30 5.83 1.500 1.71 2.60 4.96 5.45
1.461 1.73 2.76 5.29 5.82 1.501 1.71 2.60 4.95 5.44
1.462 1.73 2.76 5.28 5.80 1.502 1.71 2.59 4.94 5.43
1.463 1.73 2.75 5.27 5.79 1.503 1.71 2.59 4.94 5.43
1.464 1.73 2.75 5.26 5.78 1.504 1.71 2.58 4.93 5.42
1.465 1.73 2.74 5.25 5.77 1.505 1.71 2.58 4.92 5.41
1.466 1.73 2.74 5.24 5.76 1.506 1.71 2.58 4.91 5.40
1.467 1.73 2.74 5.23 5.74 1.507 1.71 2.57 4.90 5.39
1.468 1.72 2.73 5.22 5.73 1.508 1.71 2.57 4.90 5.39
1.469 1.72 2.73 5.21 5.72 1.509 1.71 2.57 4.89 5.38
1.470 1.72 2.72 5.20 5.71 1.510 1.71 2.56 4.88 5.37
1.471 1.72 2.72 5.19 5.70 1.511 1.71 2.56 4.87 5.36
1.472 1.72 2.71 5.18 5.69 1.512 1.71 2.56 4.86 5.35
1.473 1.72 2.71 5.18 5.68 1.513 1.71 2.55 4.86 5.35
1.474 1.72 2.71 5.17 5.67 1.514 1.71 2.55 4.85 5.34
1.475 1.72 2.70 5.16 5.66 1.515 1.71 2.54 4.84 5.33
1.476 1.72 2.70 5.15 5.65 1.516 1.71 2.54 4.83 5.22
1.477 1.72 2.69 5.14 5.64 1.517 1.71 2.54 4.82 5.31
1.478 1.72 2.69 5.14 5.63 1.518 1.71 2.53 4.82 5.31
1.479 1.72 2.68 5.13 5.62 1.519 1.70 2.53 4.81 5.30
1.480 1.72 2.68 5.12 5.61 1.520 1.70 2.53 4.80 5.29
1.481 1.72 2.68 5.11 5.60 1.521 1.70 2.52 4.79 5.28
1.482 1.72 2.67 5.10 5.59 1.522 1.70 2.52 4.79 5.27
148
K T Z Y U K T Z Y U
1.523 1.70 2.52 4.78 5.27 1.552 1.69 2.42 4.59 5.04
1.524 1.70 2.51 4.78 5.26 1.553 1.69 2.42 4.58 5.03
1.525 1.70 2.51 4.77 5.25 1.554 1.69 2.41 4.58 5.03
1.526 1.70 2.51 4.77 5.24 1.555 1.69 2.41 4.57 5.02
1.527 1.70 2.50 4.76 5.23 1.556 1.69 2.41 4.57 5.02
1.528 1.70 2.50 4.76 5.23 1.557 1.69 2.40 4.56 5.01
1.529 1.70 2.49 4.75 5.22 1.558 1.69 2.40 4.56 5.00
1.530 1.70 2.49 4.74 5.21 1.559 1.69 2.40 4.55 4.99
1.531 1.70 2.49 4.73 5.20 1.560 1.69 2.40 4.54 4.99
1.532 1.70 2.48 4.72 5.19 1.561 1.69 2.39 4.54 4.98
1.533 1.70 2.48 4.72 5.19 1.562 1.69 2.39 4.53 4.97
1.534 1.70 2.48 4.71 5.17 1.563 1.68 2.39 4.52 4.97
1.535 1.70 2.47 4.70 5.17 1.564 1.68 2.38 4.51 4.96
1.536 1.70 2.47 4.69 5.16 1.565 1.68 2.38 4.51 4.95
1.537 1.70 2.47 4.68 5.15 1.566 1.68 2.38 4.50 4.95
1.538 1.69 2.46 4.68 5.15 1.567 1.68 2.37 4.50 4.94
1.539 1.69 2.46 4.67 5.14 1.568 1.68 2.37 4.49 4.93
1.540 1.69 2.46 4.66 5.13 1.569 1.68 2.37 4.48 4.92
1.541 1.69 2.45 4.66 5.12 1.570 1.68 2.37 4.48 4.92
1.542 1.69 2.45 4.65 5.11 1.571 1.68 2.36 4.47 4.91
1.543 1.69 2.45 4.64 5.11 1.572 1.68 2.36 4.47 4.91
1.544 1.69 2.45 4.64 5.10 1.573 1.68 2.36 4.46 4.90
1.545 1.69 2.44 4.63 5.09 1.574 1.68 2.35 4.46 4.89
1.546 1.69 2.44 4.63 5.08 1.575 1.68 2.35 4.45 4.89
1.547 1.69 2.44 4.62 5.07 1.576 1.68 2.35 4.44 4.88
1.548 1.69 2.43 4.62 5.07 1.577 1.68 2.35 4.44 4.88
1.549 1.69 2.43 4.61 5.06 1.578 1.68 2.34 4.43 4.87
1.550 1.69 2.43 4.60 5.05 1.579 1.68 2.34 4.42 4.86
1.551 1.69 2.42 4.60 5.05 1.580 1.68 2.34 4.42 4.86
149
Appendix A
(Normative)
Noncircular Cross Section Vessels
A.1 General Provisions
A.1.1 This Appendix is applicable to design, fabrication and acceptance of the noncircular cross
section single-layer welded vessels. In addition to the provisions stated in this Appendix, the vessels
designed and fabricated according to this part still shall meet the relevant provisions given in other
parts of this standard.
A.1.2 The design method given in this Appendix is applicable to the vessels having a rectangular,
obround and elliptical cross section, as shown in Figure A.1~Figure A.8, and Figure A.10~Figure A.13.
As for the noncircular vessels having other shapes of cross section, the membrane stress and bending
stress may be calculated according to other analysis methods, and then the checking shall be carried
out according to the strength conditions stated in this Appendix.
A.1.3 Considerations of the calculation formula in this Appendix are merely based upon both the
membrane stress and bending stress caused by the internal pressure loads. All the local stress and
thermal stresses caused by other mechanical loads (e.g. reaction forces produced by supports, connection
pipes and other members) shall be calculated according to other suitable methods, and the strength
conditions may be determined according to A.3.
A.1.4 The calculation formula in this Appendix are applicable to those vessels of aspect ratio (the
ratio of the vessel length to the inner long side length of cross section or to the major axis) larger than
4. As for the vessels with aspect ratio less than 4, the formula in this Appendix still may be used for
calculation; however, the results shall be more conservative. If the reinforcing effects of end closures
are considered, the more accurate methods may also be used for the calculation.
A.1.5 When conducting design calculation of vessel according to this Appendix, the structural
dimensions of the vessel (like thickness, reinforcement dimensions, etc.) shall be determined in
advance, and then the stress calculation and checking shall be carried out as required until meeting all
the requirements.
A.2 Symbols
AThe parameter, see Table A.1, mm;
A1The cross-sectional area of reinforcement attached to the short-side lateral plate, mm2;
A2The cross-sectional area of reinforcement attached to the long-side lateral plate, mm2;
A3The parameter, see Table A.1, mm;
aThe major axis radius of the middle plane of elliptical cross section (see Figure A.5),
mm;
BThe parameter, see Table A.1, mm2;
bThe radius of the minor axis of the middle plane of elliptical cross section (see Figure
A.5), mm;
150
cThe distance ci from the neutral axis of plate cross section or of the combined section of
plate and reinforcement to the internal surface of calculated section or the distance co to
the external surface of calculated section. In the calculation of the bending stress of
internal and external surfaces, the ci or co value shall be substituted respectively, mm;
C1The parameter, see Table A.1, mm2;
C2The parameter, see Table A.1, mm2;
D1The parameter, see Table A.1, mm3;
D2The parameter, see Table A.1, mm3;
djThe distance from the weld to the center line (see Figure A.1~A.4, and Figure A.6~A.8),
mm;
EThe elasticity modulus of materials at normal temperature, MPa;
EtThe elasticity modulus of materials at the design temperature, MPa;
FThe parameter, see Table A.1;
HThe inside length of the short side of rectangular vessel, mm;
H1The length of the center line of reinforcement on short side of rectangular vessel (see
Figure A.6), mm;
hThe inside length of the long side of rectangular vessel, mm;
h1The length of the center line of reinforcement on long side of rectangular vessel (see
Figure A.6), mm;
I1, I2The inertia moment of the short-side lateral plate and the long-side lateral plate, the
calculation formula is as shown in Table A.1, mm4;
I11The inertia moment of the combined section of the lateral plate in thickness of 1 and the
reinforcement within the effective width W, mm4;
I21The inertia moment of the combined section of the lateral plate in thickness of 2 and the
reinforcement within the effective width W, mm4;
I22The inertia moment of the lateral plate in thickness of 22 in the asymmetric rectangle
cross section vessel, mm4;
JThe stress parameter, see Table A.3;
J2The stress parameter, see Table A.2;
J3The stress parameter, see Table A.2;
KThe parameter, see Table A.1;
K1The parameter, see Table A.1;
K2The parameter, see Table A.1;
kThe parameter, see Table A.1;
151
k1The parameter, see Table A.1;
k2The parameter, see Table A.1;
LThe half length of the long-side lateral plate of obround vessel without or with external
reinforcement (see Figure A.4 and Figure A.8) and of the rounded corner rectangular
cross section vessel without external reinforcement (see Figure A.3), mm;
L0The half length of long-side reinforcement of such externally reinforced rectangular

cross section vessel with rounded corner (see Figure A.7), mm;
L1The axial length of vessel, mm;
L11The distance from the edge of long-side reinforcement of such externally reinforced
rectangular cross section vessel with rounded corner to the edge of rounded corner (see
Figure A.7), mm;
LhThe central moment of a opening, mm;
LsThe effective width of reinforcement playing the role of reinforcement, which shall be
taken as 1 for the non-reinforced vessel, mm;
l0The half length of short-side reinforcement of such externally reinforced rectangular

cross section vessel with rounded corner (see Figure A.7), mm;
l1The half length of the short-side lateral plate of such rounded corner rectangular cross
section vessel without external reinforcement (see Figure A.3), mm;
l11The distance from the edge of short-side reinforcement of such externally reinforced
rectangular cross section vessel with rounded corner to the edge of rounded corner (see
Figure A.7), mm;
MA, MrThe bending moment, N mm;
NThe parameter, see Table A.1;
RThe mid-section radius of the large circular arc part of elliptical cross section vessel (see
Figure A.5 and Figure A.10), the calculation formula is given in Table A.1, mm;
rThe internal radius of obround cross section vessel (see Figure A.4) or the mid-section
radius of the small circular arc part of elliptical cross section vessel (see Figure A.5 and
Figure A.10). As for the mid-section radius of the small circular arc part of elliptical
cross section vessel, the calculation formula is given in Table A.1, mm;
WThe effective width of plate, mm;
The parameter, see Table A.1;
1The parameter, see Table A.1;

152
1The effective thickness of the short-side lateral plate of vessel, mm;
2The effective thickness of the long-side lateral plate of vessel, mm;
3, 4The effective thickness of stay plate;
22The effective thickness of the thicker plate among the long-side lateral plates of asymmetric
rectangular cross section vessel, mm;
bThe opening weakening factor aiming at the bending stress;
mThe opening weakening factor aiming at the membrane stress;
bThe bending stress, MPa;
mThe membrane stress, MPa;
TThe gross stress, MPa;
[]tThe allowable stress of material at design temperature, MPa;
ReL, Rp0.2The yield point of material at normal temperature, MPa;
RteL, Rtp0.2The yield point of material at design temperature, MPa;
The welding joint coefficient;
The parameter, see Table A.1.
Table A.1 Table of Calculation Parameters
No. Expression of calculation parameters Unit
1 A=r (2+2) mm
2 A3=r1 (21+) mm
2 2
3 B=r ( +2+22) mm2
4 C1=r2 (22+32+122) mm2
5 C2=r21 (221 +31+12) mm2
6 D1=r ( +2 2+122+22)
3 3 2
mm3
7 D2=r3 (43+622+242+32) mm3
8 F=(3AD12BC1)/(AD26B2)
9 I1=Ls 31 /12 mm4
10 I2=Ls 32 /12 mm4
11 K=(I2/I1)
12 K1=2k2+3
13 K2=3k1+2k2
14 k=(I21/I11)
15 k1=(I22/I2)
16 k2=(I22/I1)
17 N=K1K2k22
153
Table A.1 (continued)
No. Expression of calculation parameters Unit
18 a 2 + b 2 [ a 2 + b 2 (a b)] mm
R=
2a
19 a 2 + b 2 [ a 2 + b 2 (a b)] mm
r=
2a
20 =H/h
21 1=H1/h1
22 2=I2/I1
23 3=L/l1
24 =h/Ls or H/Ls
25 =L/r
26 1=L/r1
27 =r/l1
A.3 Strength Conditions of the Design of Noncircular Cross Section Vessel
A.3.1 This Appendix requires conducting calculation and checking for the membrane stress and
bending stress in the noncircular cross section vessel. The membrane stress caused by pressure and
mechanical load shall not be larger than []t; the gross stress (the sum of membrane stress and
bending stress) caused by pressure and mechanical load shall not exceed the following values:
(a) Shall be taken as 1.5[]t at the lateral plates of the non-reinforced cross section vessel
(Figure A.1~A.5) or at the non-reinforced rounded corner of the externally reinforced rectangular
vessel with rounded corner (Figure A.7);
(b) At the combined section of externally reinforced vessel;

t
ReL
(1) Carbon steel, low alloy steel and ferritic stainless steel: ;
1.5
t
t Rp0.2
(2) Austenitic stainless steel: whichever is smaller between 0.9R and p0.2 .
1 .5
A.3.2 When checking the stress at the weld, the welding joint coefficient of the Category A and B
joints shall be in accordance with the requirements of GB 150.1. The structure and weld leg size of the
Category C and D welds shall meet the requirements stated in Figure D.11 and Figure D.13 in
Appendix D, and their welding joint coefficient may be taken as 1.0.
A.3.3 Stress checking principles
a) As for the non-reinforced vessels, only the membrane stress and gross stress of the lateral plate
shall be calculated, and then this membrane stress and two gross stresses shall be checked according
to A.3.1;
b) As for the vessel with reinforcement, where the allowable stress and yield point of reinforcement
are same as the vessel shell, only the membrane stress of the lateral plate, the membrane stress of the
combined section of lateral plate with reinforcement and the gross stresses at the internal and external
surfaces of the combined section of lateral plate with reinforcement shall be calculated, and then this
membrane stress and two gross stresses shall be checked according to A.3.1;
154
c) As for the vessel with reinforcement, if the allowable stress and yield point of reinforcement
are different from the vessel shell, then shell and reinforcement shall be respectively calculated and
checked for their membrane stress and the gross stress at their internal and external walls.
A.3.4 The gross stress obtained through calculation shall be the algebraic sum of membrane stress
and bending stress. The positive and negative signs of the membrane stress and bending stress are
specified as follows:
a) The membrane stress shall be positive in relation to tensile stress and be negative in relation
to compressive stress;
b) When calculating the bending stress under the action of internal pressure, for the conditions
given in A.3.3 a) and b), co shall be negative and ci shall be positive; as for the condition given in
A.3.3 c), if the stress calculation point is at inner side of the neutral axis of combined section, then co
or ci shall be positive, otherwise, co or ci shall be negative.
A.4 Non-reinforced Noncircular Cross Section Vessels
A.4.1 Symmetric rectangular cross section vessels
A.4.1.1 Structure
The symmetric rectangular cross section vessels to which the calculation formula in this section
are applicable are as shown in Figure A.1. The lateral plates at two opposite sides of the vessel shall
have the same thickness, but the adjacent lateral plates may have different thickness values.
Figure A.1 Symmetric Rectangular Cross Section Vessel
A.4.1.2 Stress calculation
a) Short-side lateral plates

155
The membrane stresses at point N and point Q on the lateral plate shall be calculated according to
Formula (A-1):
pc h
bN = m(1)
Q
= (A-1)
1
The bending stresses at point N and point Q on the lateral plate shall be calculated according to
Formula (A-2) and Formula (A-3) respectively:
pc c h 2 Ls 1+ 2K
=
N
(1.5 +
2
) (A-2)
1+ K
b
12 I1
pc c h 2 Ls 1 + 2 K
bQ1= ( ) (A-3)
12 I1 1+ K
The gross stresses at point N and point Q shall be calculated according to Formula (A-4) and
Formula (A-5) respectively:
NT=Nm +Nb (A-4)
QT(1)=Qm(1)+Qb(1) (A-5)
b) Long-side lateral plates
The membrane stresses at point M and point Q on the lateral plate shall be calculated according
to Formula (A-6):
M pc h
m=Qm(2)= (A-6)
2 2
The bending stresses at point M and point Q on the lateral plate shall be calculated according to
pc c h 2 Ls 1+ 2K
= N
(1.5 + ) (A-7)
1+ K
b
12 I 2
pc c h 2 Ls 1 + 2 K
b(2)
N
= ( ) (A-8)
12 I 2 1+ K
The gross stresses at point M and point Q shall be calculated according to Formula (A-9) and
MT=Mm+Mb (A-9)
QT(2)=Qm(2)+Qb(2) (A-10)
c) In consideration of reinforced effect of heads
When the aspect ratio (L1/H or L1/h) of vessel is less than 2, the reinforced effect of heads may be
considered in the design, the bending stresses at the midpoints N and M of lateral plates shall be
determined by multiplying the calculated values from Formula (A-2) and Formula (A-7) by factor J2
as listed in Table A.2 respectively; the bending stresses at point Q at a corner of vessel shall be
156
determined by multiplying the calculated values from Formula (A-3) and Formula (A-8) by factor J3
as listed in Table A.2 respectively.
Table A.2 Factor J2 and Factor J3
L1/H or L1/h J2 J3
1.0 0.56 0.62
1.1 0.64 0.70
1.2 0.73 0.77
1.3 0.79 0.83
1.4 0.85 0.88
1.5 0.89 0.91
1.6 0.92 0.94
1.7 0.95 0.96
1.8 0.97 0.98
1.9 0.99 0.99
2.0 1.0 1.0
A.4.2 Asymmetric rectangular cross section vessels
A.4.2.1 Structure
The asymmetric rectangular cross section vessels to which the calculation formula given in this
section are applicable are as shown in Figure A.2, in which the lateral plates at two opposite sides of the
vessel shall have the same thickness, but the lateral plates at other two sides may have different thickness.
Figure A.2 Asymmetric Rectangular Cross Section Vessel
157
The membrane stresses at point Q and point Q1 on the lateral plate shall be calculated according
to Formula (A-11):
pc h
m(1)
Q
= m(1)
Q 1
= (A-11)
21
The bending stresses at point Q and point Q1 on the lateral plate shall be calculated according to
pc c h 2 Ls
b(1)
Q
= [(K2k1k2)+2k2(K2k2)] (A-12)
4 N I1
pc c h 2 Ls
b(1)
Q 1
= [(K1k1k2)+2k2(K1k2)] (A-13)
4 N I1
T(1)
Q
= m(1)
Q
+ b(1)
Q
(A-14)
T(1)
Q1
= m(1)
Q 1
+ b(1)
Q 1
(A-15)
The membrane stresses at point M1 and point Q1 on the lateral plate shall be calculated according
to Formula (A-16):
pc h
Mm=m(2)
1 Q 1
= [22N(K2+k2)+k1(K1+k2)2k2(K2K1)] (A-16)
4 N 2
The membrane stresses at point M and point Q on the lateral plate shall be calculated according
to Formula (A-17):
pc h
Mm =Qm(2)= [22N+(K2+k2)k1(K1+k2)+2k2(K2K1)] (A-17)
4 N 22
The bending stresses at points M, M1, Q and Q1 on the lateral plate shall be calculated according
to Formula (A-18)~Formula (A-21) respectively:
pc c h 2 Ls
bM = {2[(K2k1k2)+2k2(K2k2)]N} (A-18)
8 N I 22
pc c h 2 Ls
M1
= {2[(K1k1k2)+2k2(K1k2)]N} (A-19)
8N I 2
b
pc c h 2 Ls
b(2)
Q
= [(K2k1k2)+2k2(K2k2)] (A-20)
4 N I 22
158
pc c h 2 Ls
Q1
= [(K1k1k2)+2k2(K1k2)] (A-21)
4N I2
b(2)
The gross stresses at points M, M1, Q and Q1 on the lateral plate shall be calculated according to
Formula (A-22)~Formula (A-25) respectively:
MT=Mm+Mb (A-22)
MT =Mm+Mb
1 1 1
(A-23)
QT(2)=Qm(2)+Qb(2) (A-24)
T(2)
Q 1 Q
=m(2)1 Q
+b(2) 1
(A-25)
c) In consideration of reinforced effect of heads
When the aspect ratio (L1/H or L1/h) of vessel is less than 2, the reinforced effect of heads may be
considered in the design, the bending stresses at point Q and point Q1 on the short-side lateral plates
shall be determined by multiplying the calculated values from Formula (A-12) and Formula (A-13) by
factor J3 as listed in Table A.2 respectively; the bending stresses at point M and point M1 on the long-
side lateral plates shall be determined by multiplying the calculated values from Formula (A-18) and
Formula (A-19) by factor J2 as listed in Table A.2 respectively; and the bending stresses at point Q
and point Q1 on the long-side lateral plates shall be determined by multiplying the calculated values
from Formula (A-20) and Formula (A-21) by factor J3 as listed in Table A.2 respectively.
A.4.3 Rectangular cross section vessels with rounded corners
A.4.3.1 Structure
The rectangular cross section vessels with rounded corners to which the calculation formula in
this section are applicable are as shown in Figure A.3. All the lateral plates and the rounded corners of
the vessel shall have the same thickness; the radius r of rounded corner shall not be less than three
times of the thickness of lateral plate.
Figure A.3 Rectangular Cross Section Vessel with Rounded Corners

159
The membrane stresses at point C and point D on the lateral plate shall be calculated according to
Formula (A-26):
pc (r + L)
Cm =Dm = (A-26)
1
The bending stresses at point C and point D on the lateral plate shall be calculated according to
c
Cb = [2MA+pcLs(L2+2rL2rl1)] (A-27)
2 I1
c
Cb = [2MA+pcLs(L2+2rL2rl1l21 )] (A-28))
2 I1
Where MA=pcK3Ls, N mm;
l12 [3 2 (2 3 + 2) 6 (1 3 ) 32 ( 3 + 3 + 1.5 )2]

K3= , mm2
3(2 3 + + 2)
The gross stresses at point C and point D on the lateral plate shall be calculated according to
CT=Cm +Cb (A-29)
DT=Dm +Db (A-30)
The membrane stresses at point A and point B on the lateral plate shall be calculated according to
Formula (A-31):
pc (r + l1 )
Am =Bm = (A-31)
1
The bending stresses at point A and point B on the lateral plate shall be calculated according to
MA c
bA = (A-32)
I1
c
bB = (2 M A + pc L2 Ls ) (A-33)
2 I1
The gross stresses at point A and point B on the lateral plate shall be calculated according to
TA = mA + bA (A-34)
160
TB = mB + bB (A-35)
c) Rounded corner sections
The membrane stress shall be calculated according to Formula (A-36):

pc
m = ( L2 + l12 + r ) (A-36)
1
The bending stress shall be calculated according to Formula (A-37):
c
b = (2M A + pc Ls {2r[ L cos l1 (1 sin )] + L2 }) (A-37)
2 I1
Where =arctan(l1/L)(see Figure A.3), ().
The gross stress shall be calculated according to Formula (A-38):
T=m+b (A-38)
A.4.4 Obround cross section vessels
A.4.4.1 Structure
The obround cross section vessels to which the calculation formula in this section are applicable
are as shown in Figure A.4. The lateral plates of the vessel shall have the same thickness, and the two
semi-circular sections are identical in thickness, but the thickness of lateral plates may be different
from that of the semi-circular sections.
Figure A.4 Obround Cross Section Vessels

161
a) Semi-circular sections
The membrane stresses at point B and point C shall be calculated according to Formula (A-39)
and Formula (A-40) respectively:
pc r
m(1)
B
= (A-39)
1
pc (r + L)
mC = (A-40)
1
The bending stresses at point B and point C shall be calculated according to Formula (A-41) and
pc L Ls c C
b(1)
B
= 3L 1 (A-41)
6 I1 A
pc L Ls c C
bC = 3( L + 2r ) 1 (A-42)
6 I1 A
The gross stresses at point B and point C shall be calculated according to Formula (A-43) and
T(1)
B
= m(1)
B
+ b(1)
B
(A-43)
TC = mC + bC (A-44)
b) Flat lateral plates
The membrane stresses at point A and point B on the lateral plate shall be calculated according to
pc r
mA = m(2)
B
= (A-45)
2
The bending stresses at point A and point B on the lateral plate shall be calculated according to
pc L Ls c C1
bA = (A-46))
6I 2 A
pc L Ls c C
b(2)
B
= 3L 1 (A-47)
6I 2 A
162
The gross stresses at point A and point B on the lateral plate shall be calculated according to
TA = mA + bA (A-48)
T(2)
B
= m(2)
B
+ b(2)
B
(A-49)
A.4.5 Elliptical cross section vessels
A.4.5.1 Structure
The elliptical sections to which the calculation formula in this section are applicable are as shown
in Figure A.5. The cross section of the vessel is composed of the large circular arcs of middle plane
radius R and the small circular arcs of middle plane radius r, the large circular arcs and small circular
arcs may have the same or different thickness.
Figure A.5 Elliptical Cross Section Vessel
a) Small circular arc sections
The membrane stresses at point A and point C shall be calculated according to Formula (A-50)
pc a
mA = (A-50)
1
pc
m(1)
C
= ( R sin 2 + r cos 2 ) (A-51)
1
Where =arc tan(b/a), ().

163
The bending stresses at point A and point C shall be calculated according to Formula (A-52) and
MA c
bA = (A-52)
I1
c
b(1)
C
= [2 M A Ls pc (a 2 R 2 sin 2 r 2 cos 2 )] (A-53)
2 I1
pc a 2 Ls pc Ls
MA = {[ r 2 + ( R r ) 2 sin 2 ] 2 r
Where 2 2( 2 r + R )
+ [ R 2 + ( R r ) 2 cos 2 ] R ( R r )( R 2 2 r 2 ) sin 2 }, N mm;

= (1 ), rad.
2 90
The gross stresses at point A and point C shall be calculated according to Formula (A-54) and
TA = mA + bA (A-54)
T(1)
C
= m(1)
C
+ b(1)
C
(A-55)
b) Large circular arc sections
pc b
mB = (A-56)
2
pc
m(2)
C
= ( R sin 2 + r cos 2 ) (A-57)
2
c
bB = [2 M A pc Ls (a 2 b 2 )] (A-58)
2I 2
c
b(2)
C
= [2 M A Ls pc (a 2 R 2 sin 2 r 2 cos 2 )] (A-59)
2I 2
TB = mB + bB (A-60)
164
T(2)
C
= m(2)
C
+ b(2)
C
(A-61)
A.5 Externally Reinforced Noncircular Cross Section Vessels
A.5.1 Externally reinforced symmetric rectangular cross section vessels
A.5.1.1 Structure
The externally reinforced symmetric rectangular cross section vessels to which the calculation
formula in this section are applicable are as shown in Figure A.6. The reinforcements are set on the
external surface of vessel in the plane perpendicular to the vessel axis. Either the continuous welding
or the intermittent welding may be adopted for attaching the reinforcements to the lateral plates of
vessel. When intermittent welding is adopted, the arrangement of intermittent welds may be in stagger
or parallel from each other, and the distance between the intermittent welds shall not be larger than 8
times of the thickness of reinforcing plate. The length of the intermittent welds on each side of each
pair of reinforcements shall not be less than 1/2 of the length of external surface of reinforcement, the
reinforcements on the lateral plates shall be arranged symmetrically and have the same inertia moment,
however, the distance between reinforcements may be different.
Figure A.6 Externally Reinforced Symmetric Rectangular Cross Section Vessel
A.5.1.2 Allowable maximum distance of reinforcements
The distance [1] between any two adjacent reinforcements shall not be larger than minimum value
among Ls0~Ls2 that are determined by the following Formula (A-62)~Formula (A-66).

Ls = (A-62)
pc
[ ]t Z
165
Where The calculated thickness of lateral plate, taking the smaller value between 1 and 2,
mm;
ZThe factor, for 11mm, Z=2.1; for >11mm, Z=2.2.
Ls obtained according to Formula (A-62) shall be used to respectively calculate the values of
short side and long side, and then Ls1 and Ls2 shall be calculated according to Formula (A-63)~Formula
(A-66):
[ ]t J
For HLs, Ls1 = 1 (A-63)
pc
[ ]t J
For H<Ls, Ls1 = 1 (A-64)
pc
[ ]t J
For hLs, Ls2 = 2 (A-65)
pc
2 [ ]t J
For h<Ls, Ls2 = (A-66)
pc
Note 1: The distance from flat-cover to the first reinforcement is included.
Table A.3
or1/ (whichever is larger) Stress parameter J
1 4.9
1.1 4.3
1.2 3.9
1.3 3.6
1.4 3.3
1.5 3.1
1.6 2.9
1.7 2.8
1.8 2.6
1.9 2.5
2 2.4
3 2.1
4.0 2
166
Table A.4
Coefficient of effective width a

Materials
MPa
Carbon steel (C0.30) 483
Carbon steel (C>0.30) 500
Carbon-manganese steel
Carbon-molybdenum steel and low chrome-molybdenum steel 500
(Cr3Mo)
Medium chrome-molybdenum steel 479
(Cr5Mo~Cr9Mo)
Austenitic steel (up toCr25Ni20) 487
a
When the design temperature is not equal to 20, shall be corrected according to the following formula:
t = E t / E
A.5.1.3 Effective width
When calculating the inertia moment J11 and J1 of the combined section and the stress value, the
effective width Ls of reinforcement playing the reinforcement role shall be taken with following
values:
a) W calculated according to Formula (A-67):

W= (A-67)
Relt
Where The effective thickness of lateral plate, mm;
The coefficient, as listed in Table A.4.
b) A half of the sum of distances at both sides of reinforcement;
c) The smaller value between the values obtained from a) and b).
a) Short-side assembly
The membrane stresses at point N and point Q shall be calculated according to Formula (A-68):
pc h Ls
mN = m(1)
Q
= (A-68)
2( A1 + 1 Ls )
The bending stresses at point N and point Q shall be calculated according to Formula (A-69) and
pc h 2 Ls c 1 + 12 k
bN =
3 + 2
2
(A-69)
24 I11 1 + k
pc h 2 Ls c 1 + 12 k
b(1)
Q
= (A-70)
12 I11 1+ k
167
TN = mN + bN (A-71)
T(1)
Q
= m(1)
Q
+ b(1)
Q
(A-72)
b) Long-side assembly
The membrane stresses at point M and point Q shall be calculated according to Formula (A-73):
pc H Ls
mM = m(2)
Q
= (A-73)
2( A2 + 2 Ls )
The bending stresses at point M and point Q shall be calculated according to Formula (A-74) and
pc h 2 Ls c 1 + 12 k
bM = 3 + 2 (A-74)
24 I 21 1 + k
pc h 2 Ls c 1 + 12 k
Q
= (A-75)
+
b(2)
12 I 21 1 k
TM = mM + bM (A-76)
T(2)
Q
= m(2)
Q
+ b(2)
Q
(A-77)
A.5.2 Externally reinforced rectangular cross section vessels with rounded corners
A.5.2.1 Structure
The externally reinforced rectangular cross section vessels with rounded corners to which the
calculation formula in this section are applicable are as shown in Figure A.7. The reinforcements are
set on the external surfaces of lateral plates along the width direction in the plane perpendicular to the
vessel axis, and no reinforcement is set in the rounded corner parts of vessel. The reinforcements on
every pair of lateral plates shall be arranged symmetrically and shall have the same inertia moment,
the connection welds between the reinforcements and the vessel shall meet those specified in A.5.1.1.
The maximum allowable distance of reinforcements shall be determined according to A.5.1.2, but
in Formula (A-63)~Formula (A-66) and in the calculation formula of , H shall be substituted by 2ls
and h shall be substituted by 2lL (see Figure A.7).

168
When calculating the inertia moment and stress of combined section, the effective strengthening
width of reinforcement shall be determined according to A.5.1.3.
Figure A.7 Externally Reinforced Rectangular Cross Section Vessel with Rounded Corners
a) Short-side assembly
The membrane stresses at points D, E and F shall be calculated according to Formula (A-78):
pc ( L0 + L11 + r )
mD = mE = mF = (A-78)
1
The bending stresses at points D, E and F shall be calculated according to Formula (A-79)~
c ( L0 + L11 ) 2
bD = A
M + pc Ls + r ( L0 + L11 l0 l11 ) (A-79)
I1 2
c pc Ls 2
bE = M A + [ L0 + 2 L0 L11 + L11
2
2l0 l11 l112 + 2r ( L0 + L11 l0 l11 )] (A-80)
I1 2
c pc Ls
bF = M A + [( L0 + L11 ) 2 + 2r ( L0 + L11 l0 l11 ) (l0 + l11 ) 2 ] (A-81)
I11 2
Where MA=pcLsK4, N mm
169
K4=[3rL0(4r+ L0)L11(12r2+3 r L11+2L211)+12r l211
6L0 L11(L0+L11+ r+2l11)6L0l11(2r+L0)6L11 l11(2r+L11)
+6l0 l11(2r+l11)+6r2(2)(l0+l11)+4l3112L30(I1/I21)
2(I1/I11)(6L0 L11 l0+3L20 l0+3L211 l06l20 l113l0 l2116r l202l30
+6r L0 l0+6r L11 l06r l0 l11)] {6[2L11+2l11+ r+2l0(I1/I11)
+2L0(I1/I21)]} 1, mm2

The gross stresses at points D, E and F shall be calculated according to Formula (A-82)~Formula
(A-84) respectively:
TD = mD + bD (A-82)
TE = mE + bE (A-83)
TF = mF + bF (A-84)
b) Long-side assembly
The membrane stresses at points A, B and C shall be calculated according to Formula (A-85):
pc (l0 + l11 + r )
mA = mB = mC = (A-85)
2
The bending stresses at points A, B and C shall be calculated according to Formula (A-86)~
MA c
bA = (A-86)
I 21
c p L L2
bB = M A + c s 0 (A-87)
I2 2
c pc Ls 2
bC = M A + 2 ( L0 + L11 ) (A-88)
I2
The gross stresses at points A, B and C shall be calculated according to Formula (A-89)~Formula
(A-91) respectively:
TA = mA + bA (A-89)
TB = mB + bB (A-90)
TC = mC + bC (A-91)
170
c) Rounded corner sections
The membrane stress shall be calculated according to Formula (A-92):
pc
m = [ ( L0 + L112 + (l0 + l11 ) 2 + r ] (A-92)
1
The bending stress shall be calculated according to Formula (A-93):
Mr c
b = (A-93)
I1
L +L
Where M r = M A + pc Ls (L0 + L11) 0 11 + r cos + (1 sin )[r 2 r (l0 + l11 + r )], N m;
2
l0 + l11
= arc cot ().
L0 + L11
A.5.3 Externally reinforced obround cross section vessels
A.5.3.1 Structure
The externally reinforced obround cross section vessels to which the calculation formula in this
section are applicable are as shown in Figure A.8. The thickness of the lateral plates and the semi-
circular sections shall be equal, the reinforcements shall be set right round along the periphery of the
vessel. The connection welds of the reinforcements and the vessel shall meet those specified in A.5.1.1.
Figure A.8 Externally Reinforced Obround Cross Section Vessel

171
The maximum allowable distance of reinforcements shall be determined according to A.5.1.2,

but in Formula (A-63)~Formula (A-66) and in the calculation formula of , H shall be substituted by
2r and h shall be substituted by 2(L+r) (see Figure A.8).
a) Semi-circular assembly
pc r Ls
mB = (A-94)
A1 + 1 Ls
pc (r + L) Ls
mC = (A-95)
A1 + 1 Ls
Where A1The cross-sectional area of reinforcement, mm2;
pc L Ls c C
bB = 3L 2 (A-96)
6 I11 A3
pc L Ls c C2
bC = 3( L + 2r1 ) (A-97)
6 I11 A3
Where r1The radius of the reinforcement and shell combined section centroidal axis for obround
cross section vessel (see Figure A.9), mm.
TB = mB + bB (A-98)
TC = mC + bC (A-99)
b) Combined lateral plates
The membrane stress at point A shall be calculated according to Formula (A-100):
pc r Ls
mA = (A-100)
A1 + 1 Ls
172
The bending stress at point A shall be calculated according to Formula (A-101):
pc L Ls c C2
bA = (A-101)
6 I11 A3
The gross stress at point A shall be calculated according to Formula (A-102):
TA = mA + bA (A-102)
Figure A.9 Centroid of the Combined Section of Shell with Reinforcements
A.5.4 Externally reinforced elliptical cross section vessels
A.5.4.1 Structure
The externally reinforced elliptical cross section vessels to which the calculation formula in this
section are applicable are as shown in Figure A.10. The cross section of the vessel is composed of the
large circular arcs with a middle plane radius in R and the small circular arcs with a middle plane radius
in r, the large circular arcs and small circular arcs shall have the same thickness, and the reinforcements
shall be set right around the periphery of vessel. The connection welds of the reinforcements and the
vessel shall meet those specified in A.5.1.1.
The maximum allowable distance of reinforcements shall be determined according to A.5.1.2, but
in Formula (A-63)~Formula (A-66) and in the calculation formula of , H shall be substituted by 2b
173
and h shall be substituted by 2a (See Figure A.10).
Figure A.10 Externally Reinforced Elliptical Cross Section Vessel
a) Small circular arc sections
The membrane stresses at point A and point C shall be calculated according to Formula (A-103)
pc a Ls
mA = (A-103)
A1 + 1 Ls
pc Ls
mC = ( R sin 2 + r cos 2 ) (A-104)
A1 + 1 Ls
Where A1The cross-sectional area of reinforcement, mm2.
b
=arccot ().
a
MA c
bA = (A-105)
I11
174
c
bC = (2 M A Ls pc {[ a 2 + 2 A4 (a r )] [ R 2 + 2 A4 ( R r )] sin 2 r 2 cos 2 }) (A-106)
2 I11
pc a 2 Ls pc Ls
MA = {[r 2 + ( R r ) 2 sin 2 2 A4 (a r )] r
Where 2 2(r + R )
+ [ R 2 + ( R r )2 cos 2 + 2 A4 ( R a )] R ( R + r + A4 )( R r ) 2 sin 2 }

= (1 ) , rad;
2 90
A4=a1a, mm;
a1The radius of the major axis of the ellipse in neutral line of the combined section of
shell and reinforcements, mm.
TA = mA + bA (A-107)
TC = mC + bC (A-108)
b) Large circular arc sections
The membrane stress at point B shall be calculated according to Formula (A-109):
pc b Ls
mB = (A-109)
A1 + 1 Ls
The bending stress at point B shall be calculated according to Formula (A-110):
c
bB = {2 M A pc Ls [a 2 b 2 + 2 A(a b]} (A-110)
2 I11
The gross stress at point B shall be calculated according to Formula (A-111):
TB = mB + bB (A-111)
A.6 Stayed Vessels of Noncircular Cross Section
A.6.1 Single-stayed vessels of symmetric rectangular cross section
A.6.1.1 Structure
The single-stayed vessels of symmetric rectangular cross section to which the calculation formula
in this section are applicable are as shown in Figure A.11. The stay plate shall be set at the midpoint of
the long-side lateral plate of vessel, and the stay plate may be a plate welded on vessel along full
length of lateral plate. But the stay plate shall not be under any transverse action of pressure, or else
175
shall be regarded as the lateral plate of independent compression chamber to conduct the calculation.
pc h 2 + K (5 2 )
mN = m(1)
Q
= 4 (A-112)
41 1 + 2K
Stay
Figure A.11 Strengthened Single-stayed Vessel of Symmetric Rectangular Cross Section
The bending stresses at point N and point Q shall be calculated according to Formula (A-113)
pc h 2 c Ls 1 + 2 2 K
bN = 3 2
+ 2 (A-113)
24 I1 1 + 2 K
pc h 2 c Ls 1 + 2 2 K
b(1)
Q
= (A-114)
12 I1 1 + 2K
TN = mN + bN (A-115)
176
T(1)
Q
= m(1)
Q
+ b(1)
Q
(A-116)
pc H
mM = m(2)
Q
= (A-117)
2 2
The bending stresses at point M and point Q shall be calculated according to Formula (A-118)
pc h 2 c Ls 1 + K (3 2 )
bM = (A-118)
12 I 2 1 + 2K
pc h 2 c Ls 1 + 2 2 K
b(2)
Q
= (A-119)
12 I 2 1 + 2K
TM = mM + bM (A-120)
T(2)
Q
= m(2)
Q
+ b(2)
Q
(A-121)
c) Stay plates
The membrane stress of stay plate shall be calculated according to Formula (A-122):
pc h 2 + K (5 2 )
m = (A-122)
2 3 1 + 2 K
A.6.2 Double-stayed vessel of symmetric rectangular cross section
A.6.2.1 Structure
The double-stayed vessels of symmetric rectangular cross section to which the calculation formula
in this section are applicable are as shown in Figure A.12. Two stay plates shall be uniformly distributed
along the lateral plates at long side, and the thickness of these two stay plates may be same or not. The
stay plates may be the panels welded on the vessel along the full length of lateral plates, but they shall
not be under any transverse action of pressure, or else shall be regarded as the lateral plates of independent
compression chamber to conduct the calculation.
177
pc h 6 + K (11 2 )
=
N Q
= 3 (A-123)
21 3 + 5K
m m(1)

The bending stresses at point N and point Q shall be calculated according to Formula (A-124)
pc h 2 c Ls 3 + 5 2 K
bN = 3 2
+ 2 (A-124)
24 I1 3 + 5K
pc h 2 c Ls 3 + 5 2 K
Q
= (A-125)
3 + 5K
b(1)
12 I1
Stay
Stay
Figure A.12 Strengthened Double-stayed Vessel of Symmetric Rectangular Cross Section
The gross stresses stressed at point N and point Q shall be calculated according to Formula (A-126)
TN = mN + bN (A-126)
T(1)
Q
= m(1)
Q
+ b(1)
Q
(A-127)

178
pc H
mM = m(2)
Q
= (A-128)
2 2
The bending stresses at point M and point Q shall be calculated according to Formula (A-129)
pc h 2 c Ls 3 + K (6 2 )
bM = (A-129)
12 I 2 3 + 5K
pc h 2 c Ls 3 + 5 2 K
b(2)
Q
= (A-130)
12 I 2 3 + 5K
TM = mM + bM (A-131)
T(2)
Q
= m(2)
Q
+ b(2)
Q
(A-132)
c) Stay plates
pc h 6 + K (11 2 )
m = (A-133)
2 3 + 5K
Where, shall be the smaller value between 3 and 4.
A.6.3 Single-stayed vessels of obround cross section
A.6.3.1 Structure
The single-stayed vessels of obround cross section to which the calculation formula in this section
are applicable are as shown in Figure A.13. The stay plates may be the panels welded on the vessel
along the full length of lateral plates, but they shall not be under any transverse action of pressure, or
else shall be regarded as the lateral plates of independent compression chamber to conduct the calculation.
a) Semi-circular sections
pc r
m(1)
B
= (A-134)
1
179
pc
mC = [2(r + L) L F ] (A-135)
21
pc L c Ls C1
b(1)
B
= F ( B A L) 3 + A L (A-136)
2 I1 A
pc L c Ls C1
bC = F ( B A L A r ) + A( L + 2 r )
3
(A-137)
2 I1 A
Stay plate
Figure A.13 Strengthened Single-stayed Vessel of Obround Cross Section
180
T(1)
B
= m(1)
B
+ b(1)
B
(A-138)
TC = mC + bC (A-139)
b) Lateral plates
The membrane stresses at point A and point B shall be calculated according to Formula (A-140):
pc r
mA = m(2)
B
= (A-140)
2
The bending stresses at point A and point B shall be calculated according to Formula (A-141) and
pc L c Ls C
bA = BF 1 (A-141)
2I 2 A 3
pc L c Ls C1
b(2)
B
= F ( B A L) 3 + A L (A-142)
2I 2 A
The gross stresses at point A and point B shall be calculated according to Formula (A-143) and
TA = mA + bA (A-143)
T(2)
B
= m(2)
B
+ b(2)
B
(A-144)
c) Stay plates
pc L F
m = (A-145)
3
A.7 Opening Reinforcement
A.7.1 Reinforcement of single opening in lateral plates
A.7.1.1 The calculation method for reinforcement of single opening given in this section is applicable
to those openings with diameter not larger than a half of the length of such lateral plate in which the
opening of cross section is set.
A.7.1.2 The conditions under which the single opening in lateral plate requires no separate rein-
forcement are same as the relevant provisions given in Chapter 6.
A.7.1.3 The calculation and checking methods for the reinforcement of single opening shall be in
accordance with those specified in Chapter 6, however, the minimum reinforcement area required by
the weakening of opening shall be determined according to Formula (A-146).
181
A=0.5d+2t(1fr) (A-146))
Where AThe minimum reinforcement area required for the weakening due to opening, mm2;
dThe opening diameter after corrosion, mm;
The calculated thickness of the lateral plate at the opening location, mm;
etThe calculated thickness of the lateral plate opening adapter, mm;
frThe strength weakening factor, which is equal to the ratio of the allowable stress of
connection pipe material to that of shell material and shall be taken as 1.0 when this
ratio is larger than 1.0.
A7.2 Reinforcement of ligaments in lateral plates
A7.2.1 The weakening of the strength of lateral plates due to the ligaments shall be considered by
using the weakening factor of opening m and b in the stress calculation. If the values of m and b are
less than the welding joint coefficient , the membrane stress and bending stress calculated according
to no ligament shall be divided by m and b respectively, and =1.0 for the later stress checking that
is carried out according to the strength conditions specified in A.3.1; if the values of m and b are
larger than the welding joint coefficient , then both the membrane stress and bending stress shall be
calculated and checked according to the condition without ligament, and the influence of the weakening
factor of openings may not be considered.
Figure A.14 Openings of Uniform Pitch and Diameter
Figure A.15 Openings of Uniform Pitch But Multi Diameters
A.7.2.2 Calculation of weakening factor of openings
A.7.2.2.1 Weakening factor of the openings of uniform pitch and diameter (see Figure A.14)
When calculating the membrane stress and bending stress, the weakening factor of opening shall
be calculated according to Formula (A-147):
182
Lh d
m = b = (A-147)
Lh
A.7.2.2.2 Weakening factor of the openings of uniform pitch but multi diameters (see Figure A.15)
a) For the membrane stress, the weakening factor of opening shall be calculated according to
Formula (A-148):
Lh De
m = (A-148))
Lh
Where DeThe equivalent diameter of opening if multi-diameters, mm;
1
De= (d0 0+d1 1++ dn n);

d0, d1,, dnThe diameter of opening (see Figure A.15), mm;
0, 1,, nThe thickness at the position where the diameter is d0, d1,dn (see Figure
A.15), mm.
b) For the bending stress, the weakening factor of opening shall be calculated according to
Formula (A-149):
6I
b = (A-149)
2 c Lh
1
Where I= (b0 03 + b1 13 + L + bn n3 ) +
12

2

b0 0 0 + 1 + L + n x +
2

2

b1 1 1 + 2 + + n x +
2
LL +

2

bn n x n , mm4 (A-150)
2
b0=Lhd0, mm;
b1=Lhd1, mm;
b2=Lhd2, mm;
bn=Lhdn, mm;
183

x = b0 0 0 + 1 + 2 + L + n
2

+ b1 1 1 + 2 + 3 + L + n
2

+ b2 2 2 + 3 + 4 + L + n
2
n
+ bn n (b0 0 + b1 1 + b2 2 + + bn n ) 1 , mm
2
ci=x (A-151)
co=x (A-152)
ci
c = whichever is larger, mm.
co
c) When calculating the bending stress, the values, such as I, ci, and co, shall be determined
according to Formula (A-150)~(A-152).
When calculating the bending stress, the values, such as I, ci, and co, shall be determined according
to Formula (A-148)~(A-150).
A.8 Calculation and Checking of Stress at Welding Joint or Ligament
A.8.1 The stress formula given in A.4~A.6 are used for calculate the stress at the position with
maximum bending moment in the cross section of vessel. If the welding joints or ligaments are not at
the position of maximum bending moment but at other positions on lateral plates, then the stress at
this weld or ligament shall be calculated and checked separately. Table A.5 gives the calculation formula
of bending stress at any position on the straight edges of various noncircular cross section vessels
(excluding the elliptical cross section vessel), the stress may be calculated by using Table A.5, and
then the stress checking shall be carried out according to the strength conditions given in A.3.1.
A.8.2 The calculation of membrane stress shall adopt the same method as the ones given in Section
A.4~A.6. In case any ligament is set at the calculated stress position, then influence of the weakening
factor m of opening shall be considered according to A.7.2.1.
A.8.3 The calculation of bending stress shall be in accordance with Table A.5, the bending stress at
relevant positions on the noncircular cross section vessels that are not included in Table A.5 may be
calculated by adopting with other stress analysis methods. In case any ligament is set at the position
for calculating stress, the influence of the weakening factor b of opening shall be considered according
to A.7.2.1.
A.8.4 The calculation of gross stress shall be the same as those mentioned in corresponding articles
above. The checking methods of membrane stress and gross stress shall be in accordance with those
184
specified in A.3.1.
Table A.5 Calculation Formula of Bending Stress at Welding joints on Lateral Plates
Figure No. Joint location between Bending stress (b) at joint, MPa
pc c h 2 Ls 1+ 2 K d2
M and Q 1.5 + + 6 2j
12 I 2 1+ K h
A.1
pc c h 2 Ls 1+ 2 K d2
1.5 + + 6 2j
2
N and Q
12 I 2 1+ K h
pc c h 2 Ls 1 1 d j
2
M and Q [( K 2 k1 k 2 ) + 2 k 2 ( K 2 k 2 )] + 2
12 I 22 2 N 4 h
A.2
pc c h 2 Ls 1 1 d
2
M1 and Q1 [( K1 k1 k 2 ) + 2 k 2 ( K1 k 2 )] + 2j
12 I 2 2 N 4 h
c pc d j2 Ls

A and B MA +
I1 2

A.3
c p L
M A + c s ( L2 + 2r L 2r l1 l12 + d j2 )
I1
D and C
2
pc c Ls LC1 d j2
A.4 A and B +
I2 6A 2

pc c h 2 Ls 1 + 12 k d2
M and Q 3 + 2 + 12 2j

24 I 21 1+ k h
A.6
pc c h 2 Ls 1 + 12 k d2
N and Q 3 + 2 + 12 2j
24 I11 1+ k h
c p d2 L
A and B MA + c j s
I 21 2

c pc d j2 Ls

B and C MA +
I 2 2

A.7
c Ls 2
M A + pc [( L0 + L11 ) + 2r ( L0 + L11 l0 l11 ) (l0 + l11 ) + d j ]
2 2
F and E
I11 2
c Ls 2
M A + pc [( L0 + L11 ) + 2r ( L0 + L11 l0 l11 ) 2l0 l11 l11 + d j ]
2 2
E and D
I1 2
pc c Ls LC 2 d j2
A.8 A and B +
I11 6A 2
2
A.9 End Closure
The design of end closure may be in compliance with the relevant requirements of Chapter 5.
A.10 Fabrication and Acceptance
A.10.1 For the circular arc sections of the noncircular cross section vessels (such as the semicircular
sections of obround cross section vessels, and the large and small circular arc sections of elliptical cross
section vessels), the difference between the maximum and minimum internal radiuses of completed
cross section shall neither be larger than 1% of the design internal radius nor be larger than 15mm.
185
A.10.2 For the rectangular cross section vessels, the difference in the length of two diagonal lines of
the cross section after forming shall neither be larger than 1% of the design length of diagonal line nor
be larger than 30mm. The limit deviations for width of lateral plate and other dimensions shall meet
those specified in GB 150.4.
A.10.3 The straightness of vessel shall not be larger than 2, and the offset in the gross length of
vessel shall not be larger than 20mm.
A.10.4 The requirements of non-destructive inspection on Category A and B welds are detailed in
GB 150.4; for the rectangular cross section vessels without rounded corner, the surface of welding
joint at the corner of two adjacent lateral plates shall be carried out with magnetic particle testing or
penetrant testing.
186
Appendix B
(Normative)
Flat Steel Ribbon Wound Cylinder
B.1 General Provisions
This appendix is applicable to the design of flat steel ribbon wound cylinder of which the internal
diameter is larger than or equal to 500mm.
B.2 Terms, Definitions and Symbols
B.2.1 For the purpose of this part in this standard, the terms and definitions defined the General
Requirements GB 150.1 apply.
B.2.2 Symbols
BThe width of steel ribbon, mm;
C2The corrosion allowance of inner cylinder, mm;
DiThe internal diameter of cylinder body, mm;
DkThe average diameter of the kth layer of steel ribbon, mm;
ekThe inter-ribbon gap of the kth layer of steel ribbon, mm;
jThe ratio of the nominal thickness of inner cylinder to the nominal thickness of flat steel
ribbon wound cylinder;
K1The ratio of the external diameter to the internal diameter of inner cylinder;
K2The ratio of the external diameter to the internal diameter of steel ribbon layer;
mThe design number of steel ribbon layers;
mcThe calculated number of steel ribbon layers;
mkThe quantity of steel ribbons at the kth layer;
PcThe calculating pressure, MPa;
RiThe internal radius of inner cylinder, mm;
RjThe external radius of inner cylinder, mm;
RmiThe lower limit value of the standard tensile strength of inner cylinder material at the
normal temperature, MPa;
RmwThe lower limit value of the standard tensile strength of steel ribbon material at the
normal temperature, MPa;
RoThe external radius of steel ribbon layer, mm;
yThe coefficient;
The average winding inclination angle of the steel ribbons in relation to the circumferential
direction of cylinder body, ();
187
kThe winding inclination angle of the kth layer of steel ribbons, ();
The calculated thickness of flat steel ribbon wound cylinder, mm;
iThe design thickness of inner cylinder, mm;
nThe nominal thickness of flat steel ribbon wound cylinder, mm;
niThe nominal thickness of inner cylinder, mm;
nwThe nominal thickness of steel ribbon layer, mm;
rThe thickness of steel ribbon, mm;
The welding joint coefficient;
The average lead for the winding of steel ribbons, mm;
cThe calculated lead for the winding of steel ribbons, mm;
[]tThe allowable stress of the materials of flat steel ribbon wound cylinder at the design
temperature, MPa;
[ ]it The allowable stress of the materials of inner cylinder at the design temperature, MPa;
[ ]tw The allowable stress of the materials of steel ribbons at the design temperature, MPa.
B.3 Structure
The flat steel ribbon wound cylinder is composed of inner cylinder, steel ribbon layer and protective
cover, as shown in Figure B.1. The thickness of protective cover shall be 3mm~6mm, and the protective
cover shall not bear the action of internal pressure.
Explanation: 1End flange; 2Inner cylinder; 3Steel ribbon layer; 4Protective cover.
Figure B.1 Structure of Flat Steel Ribbon Wound Cylinder
B.4 Thickness of Flat Steel Ribbon Wound Cylinder
B.4.1 The calculated thickness of flat steel ribbon wound cylinder shall be calculated according to
Formula (B-1):
188
pc Di
= (B-1)
2[ ]t pc
The allowable stress of the materials of flat steel ribbon wound cylinder at the design temperature
shall be calculated according to Formula (B-2):
[]t=j[]ti +y(1j)[]tw (B-2)
Where y= 0.98;
1 1
j= ~ .
8 4
B.4.2 The design thickness of inner cylinder shall be calculated according to Formula (B-3):
i=j+C2 (B-3)
i shall be rounded off upward to the thickness of the steels with standard specifications so as to
obtain ni.
B.4.3 The calculated number of steel ribbon layers shall be calculated according to Formula (B-4):
(1 j )
mc = (B-4)
r
Where, r=4mm~8mm. mc shall be rounded off upward to the proximate even number so as to obtain
m.
B.4.4 The nominal thickness of steel ribbon layer shall be calculated according to Formula (B-5):
nw=mr (B-5)
B.4.5 The nominal thickness of flat steel ribbon wound cylinder shall be calculated according to
Formula (B-6):
n=ni+nw (B-6)
B.5 Winding Parameters of Steel Ribbons
B.5.1 Average winding inclination angle of steel ribbons
The average winding inclination angle of steel ribbons shall be calculated according to Formula
(B-7):
0.95( K 221) RnwRmi [0.95( K121)/K122lnK1/ 3 ]

= arccos (B-7)
Rmw [lnK 20.831 25( K 221)]
B.5.2 Average lead for the winding of steel ribbons
The calculated lead for the winding of steel ribbons shall be calculated according to Formula
(B-8):
189
RoR j
c = 2 ( )tan (B-8))
2
In the lead of the ribbon winding machine, the value proximate to c shall be selected as .
B.5.3 Winding inclination angle of steel ribbons
The winding inclination angle of the kth layer of steel ribbons shall be calculated according to
Formula (B-9):
k=arctan(/Dk) (B-9)
B.5.4 Quantity of steel ribbons at one same layer
The quantity of steel ribbons at the kth layer shall be calculated according to Formula (B-10):
mk=(Dk/B)sink (B-10)
mc shall be rounded off upward to the proximate integral number.
B.5.5 Inter-ribbon gap
The inter-ribbon gap of the kth layer of steel ribbons shall be calculated according to Formula
(B-11):
ek=(Dk/mk)sinkB (B-11)
Where, B=80mm~160mm, ek shall be less than or equal to 3mm. Otherwise, the value shall be
adjusted and ek shall be recalculated.
190
Appendix C
(Informative)
Seal Structure
C.1 General Provisions

This appendix specifies the design methods for the metal flat gasket seal, double-cone ring seal,
Wood seal, Casale seal, octagonal ring and oval ring seal, and clip fastened structure used for cylinder
pressure vessels.
Table C.1 Application Scope
Seal structure type Design temperature, Design pressure, MPa Internal diameter Di, mm
16 1 000
Metal flat gasket seal 0~200 >16~22 800
>22~35 600
Double-cone ring seal 0~400 6.4~35 400~3 200
Wood seal
Casale seal
35
Octagonal ring and oval ring seal
Clip fastened structure
C.2 Metal Flat Gasket Seal

C.2.1 Symbols
bThe width of flat gasket, mm;
DiThe internal diameter, mm;
The thickness of flat gasket, mm;
pThe thickness of flat-cover, mm.
C.2.2 Structure
The structure of metal flat gasket seal is as shown Figure C.1.
Explaination: 1Mother nut; 2Washer; 3Flat-cover; 4King bolt; 5Cylindrical end; 6Flat gasket
Figure C.1 Structure of Metal Flat Gasket Seal

191
C.2.3 Materials and dimensions of flat gasket
C.2.3.1 Materials of flat gasket
a) Annealed aluminium (hardness: 15 HBW10/250~30 HBW10/250);
b) Annealed red copper (hardness: 30 HBW10/500~50 HBW10/500);
c) Steel designation 10.
C.2.3.2 The width b and thickness of flat gasket shall be selected according to Table C.2 and Table
C.3.
Table C.2 Width b of Flat Gasket
Internal diameter Di, mm

Design pressure
100 >100~200 >200~300 >300~400 >400~500 >500~600 >600~700 >700~800 >800~1000
MPa
Width of flat gasket, mm
16 6 6 6 7 8 9 10 10 12
>16~22 6 6 7 8 9 10 10 12
>22~35 6 7 8 9 10 12
Table C.3 Thickness of Flat Gasket mm
Width b Thickness
6 3
7~9 5
10~12 6
C.2.4 Sealing surface
The dimensions of sealing surface shall be determined according to Table C.4. There shall be two
1mm-deep triangular grooves on the sealing surface of flat-cover and cylindrical end. The fit tolerances
of sealing surface are as shown in Figure C.2.
Table C.4 Dimensions of Sealing Surface mm
Di D1 h1 h2
100 Di+6
>100~200 Di+8
>200~400 Di+10
26+1 2.5
>400~600 Di+12
>600~800 Di+12
>800~1 000 Di+12
C.2.5 Cylindrical end
The design of cylindrical end, king bolt and mother nut shall be in accordance with those
specified in 7.7 of Chapter 7.
C.2.6 Flat-cover
The structure of flat-cover is as shown in Figure C.3, and the thickness shall be calculated
according to Formula (5-33) in Chapter 5.
192
Flat-cover
Flat gasket
Cylindrical end
Figure C.2 Fitting Tolerance of Sealing Surfaces Figure C.3 Flat-cover
C.3 Double-cone Ring Seal
C.3.1 Symbols
AThe height of double-cone ring, mm;
BThe thickness of double-cone ring, mm;
bThe effective height of double-cone ring, mm;
CThe height of lateral surface of double-cone ring, mm;
DbThe diameter of the center circle of bolt hole, mm;
DGThe average diameter of sealing surface, mm;
DTThe diameter of the supporting plane of flat-over, mm;
D1The diameter of the inner column surface of double-cone ring, mm;
EThe modulus of elasticity of the materials at design temperature, MPa;
FThe axial force caused by internal pressure, N;
FcThe axial component of the resilience force of double-cone ring, N;
FpThe axial component of the self-tightening action of double-cone ring, N;
fThe cross sectional area of the double-cone ring, mm2;
gThe single-side radial clearance (see Figure C.4), mm;

193
h1The thickness (see Figure C.5), mm;
PcThe calculating pressure, MPa;
WThe total load of king bolt, N;
WaThe bolt load at the pre-tightening state, N;
WpThe bolt load at the operating state, N;
yThe sealing specific pressure, MPa;
The cone angle of the sealing surface of double-cone ring, ();
The friction angle;
aThe cut stress of the circumferential cross section aa, MPa;
mThe bending stress at the midpoint of double-cone ring, MPa;
maThe bending stress of the circumferential cross section aa, MPa;
oaThe equivalent stress of the circumferential cross section aa, MPa;
[]tThe allowable stress of the component materials at the design temperature, MPa.
C.3.2 Structure
C.3.2.1 The structure of double-cone ring seal is as shown Figure C.4.
C.3.2.2 The double-cone ring shall be fixed on the flat-cover by using supporting ring and bolt. The
single-side radial clearance [g= (D1DT)/2] between the inner column surface of double-cone ring and
the supporting surface of column shall be controlled within a range of 0.075% and 0.125% of the
diameter of the inner column surface of double-cone ring.
C.3.2.3 The column supporting surface of flat-cover shall be set with several longitudinal semicircular
grooves.
C.3.2.4 The soft metal gasket between sealing surfaces shall be about 1mm thick, the sealing
characteristic paremeters are detailed in Table 7-2. The nonmetallic gasket shall be 0.5mm~1mm thick,
and the diameter ds of soft metal wire shall be 2mm~5mm, its sealing characteristic paremeters and
friction angle shall be determined according to experience.
C.3.2.5 As shown in Figure C.4 b), two semicircular grooves with radius of 1mm~1.5mm and depth
of 1mm or two 1mm-deep triangular grooves shall be machined respectively on the two sealing surfaces
of double-cone ring, the radius of rounded corner at the groove opening shall be about 0.5mm; as
shown in Figure C.4 c), one or two semicircular grooves shall be machined respectively on the two
sealing surfaces of the double-cone ring, and the groove diameter shall be d+0.1
s mm.
As for the sealing surface of double-cone ring, the cone angle shall be = 30o +15 and the
0
C.3.2.6
roughness Ra shall be 3.2m~1.6m. As for the sealing surfaces of flat-cover and cylindrical end, the
+15
cone angle shall be = 30o 0 and the roughness Ra shall be 3.2m~1.6m.
C.3.3 Materials of double-cone ring, soft gasket and soft metal wire
C.3.3.1 As for the double-cone ring, the Grade III or IV forgings for pressure vessels, like 35, 16Mn,
20MnMo, 15CrMo, S30408 and S32168, shall be selected.
194
Semicircular groove Semicircular groove
a) b) Soft gasket c) Soft metal wire
Explaination: 1Mother nut; 2Washer; 3King bolt; 4Flat-cover; 5Double-cone ring; 6Soft gasket or metal wire;
7Cylindrical end; 8Bolt; 9Supporting ring
Figure C.4 Structure of Double-cone Ring Seal
C.3.3.2 The materials and soft gasket and soft metal wire shall be selected according to Table C.5.
Table C.5 Materials of Soft Gasket and Soft Metal Wire
Soft gasket Soft metal wire
Flexible graphite Silver
Annealed aluminium (hardness: 15 HBW10/250~30 HBW10/250)

Annealed red copper (hardness: 30 HBW10/500~50 HBW10/500)
Pure iron
Austenitic stainless steel
C.3.4 Structural dimensions of double-cone ring
The structural dimensions of double-cone ring shall be determined according to Formula (C.1)~
(C.3).
A = 2.7 Di (C-1)
C=(0.5~0.6)A (C-2)
A C 0.75 pc
B= (C-3)
2 m
Where, the bending stress at the midpoint of double-cone ring: m=50MPa~100MPa.
The serial structural dimensions of double-cone ring are recommended as Table C.6.
The design of cylindrical end, king bolt and mother nut shall be in accordance with those
specified in 7.7. However, when determining Am, the bolt loads Wa and Wp in Formula (7-4) and
195
Formula (7-5) shall be calculated according to Formula (C-4) and Formula (C-6) respectively.
Table C.6 Serial Structural Dimensions of Double-cone Ring
Internal diameter of sealing end Di/mm Design pressure/MPa A/mm B/mm C/mm D1/mm
1000 85 23 48 975
1200 94 26 54 1171
1400 101 28 58 1369
1600 108 29 62 1569
1800 115 31 66 1766
2000 121 33 69 1964

6.4
2200 127 34 72 2164
2400 132 36 75 2361
2600 138 38 79 2558
2800 143 39 82 2757
3000 148 40 84 2957
3200 153 42 87 3154
1000 85 25 47 972
1200 94 27 52 1170
1400 101 30 56 1366
1600 108 31 59 1566
1800 115 33 63 1764
2000 121 35 67 1961

10
2200 127 37 70 2159
2400 132 39 73 2356
2600 138 40 76 2556
2800 143 42 79 2753
3000 148 43 81 2953
3200 153 45 84 3150
600 66 23 33 573
800 76 27 38 768
1000 85 30 43 964
1200 94 33 47 1161
1400 101 36 51 1357
1600 108 38 54 1555
1800 115 40 58 1753

20
2000 121 43 61 1949
2200 127 45 64 2146
2400 132 46 66 2346
2600 138 48 69 2544
2800 143 50 72 2741
3000 148 52 74 2939
3200 153 54 77 3136
196
Table C.6 (continued)
Internal diameter of sealing end Di/mm Design pressure/MPa A/mm B/mm C/mm D1/mm
400 54 22 27 372
500 60 24 30 469
600 66 27 33 565
700 71 29 36 662
800 76 31 38 760
1000 85 34 43 956
1200 94 38 47 1151
1400 101 41 51 1347
1600 35 108 44 54 1543
1800 115 43 58 1741
2000 121 49 61 1937
2200 127 51 64 2134
2400 132 53 66 2332
2600 138 56 69 2528
2800 143 58 72 2725
3000 148 60 74 2923
3200 153 62 77 3120
C.3.5.1 The load of king bolt at pre-tightening state shall be calculated according to Formula (C-4):
sin ( + )
Wa=1.57DG(AG)y (C-4)
coscos
The average sealing diameter of double-cone ring shall be calculated according to Formula (C-5):
AC
DG=D1+2B tan (C-5)
2
C.3.5.2 The load of the king bolt at operating state shall be calculated according to Formula (C-6):
Wp=F+Fp+Fc (C-6)
The total axial force caused by internal pressure shall be calculated according to Formula (C-7):
F=0.785D2G pc (C-7)
The axial component of the self-fastening action of double-cone ring shall be calculated according
to Formula (C-8):
Fp=1.57DGbpctan() (C-8)
The effective height of double-cone ring shall be calculated according to Formula (C-9):
1
b= (A+C) (C-9)
2
The axial component of the resilience force of double-cone ring shall be calculated according to
197
Formula (C-10):
2g
Fc=3.14f Etan() (C-10)
D1
Where, single-side radial clearance g=(0.075%~0.125%)D1. Where steel contacts with steel, =830';
where steel contacts with copper, =1031'; where steel contacts with aluminium, =15.
The cross sectional area of double-cone ring shall be calculated according to Formula (C-11):
AC 2
f = AB ( ) tan (C-11)
2
C.3.6 Flat-cover
The structure of flat-cover is as shown in Figure C.5. Its thickness p shall be calculated according
to Formula (5-33) in Chapter 5 by using DG in place of Dc.
The equivalent stress acting on the circumferential cross section aa of flat-cover shall be
checked according to Formula (C-12):
oa = ma
2
3 a2 0.7[]t (C-12)
The bending stress of circumferential cross section aa shall be calculated according to Formula
(C-13):
3W ( Db DG )
ma = (C-13)
3.14 DG h12
The cut stress of the circumferential cross section aa shall be calculated according to Formula
(C-14):
W
a = (C-14)
3.14 DG h1
Figure C.5 Flat-cover
198
C.4 Wood Seal
C.4.1 Symbols
CThe calculation coefficient (see Formula C-44);
DaThe diameter of the circumferential cross section aa, mm;
DcThe diameter of the contact circle for sealing, mm;
DnThe diameter of the neutral surface YY at cylindrical end, mm;
DoThe external diameter, mm;
D1The internal diameter of constraining ring, mm;
D3The external diameter of constraining ring, mm;
D5The diameter of the circumferential cross section a-a of top cover, mm;
D6The diameter (see Figure C.9), mm;
dkThe diameter of the bolt hole or screw hole, mm;
FaThe axial component of the sealing force of sealing gasket, N;
HThe moment arm (see Figure C.10), mm;
hThe thickness (see Figure C.7), mm;
IcThe inertia moment of longitudinal cross section, mm4;
LThe characteristic length (see Figure C.9), mm;
lThe characteristic length (see Figure C.9), mm;
l1, l2The characteristic length (see Figure C.10), mm;
MThe bending moment of longitudinal cross section, N mm;
MmaxThe maximum bending moment acting on unit length of the circumferential cross section
aa, N mm/mm;
MrThe bending moment per unit length, N mm/mm;
M1The bending moment per unit length of neutral surface, N mm/mm;
M3, M4The bending moment per unit length, N mm/mm;
nThe quantity of tightening bolts;

199
QrThe radial load caused by the sealing counterforce, N;
qrThe radial load per unit length along the neutral surface YY, N/mm;
q1The linear sealing specific pressure, N/mm;
SThe thickness at the circumferential cross section aa, mm;
SoThe distance from the neutral surface YY at cylindrical end to the diameter D7, mm;
ZThe section modulus in bending of the longitudinal cross section, mm3;
ZcThe distance from the centroid of longitudinal cross section to the outermost edge of
cross section, mm;
The cone angle of compression gasket, ();
The calculation coefficient, mm 1;

The thickness of constraining ring, mm;
1The thickness of top cover, mm;
The friction angle;
The Poissons ratio of materials at the average wall temperature;
bThe cut stress of the circumferential cross section bb, MPa;
aThe tensile stress of the circumferential cross section aa, MPa;
mThe bending stress, MPa;
mbThe bending stress of the circumferential cross section bb, MPa;
obThe equivalent stress of the circumferential cross section bb, MPa;
C.4.2 Structure
The structure of Wood seal is as shown Figure C.6.
The sealing between top cover and compression gasket shall be designed as line contact. Materials
with appropriate strength shall be adopted in the design for the sealing surfaces to prevent from
collapse under excessive sealing force.
1~2 ring grooves shall be machined on the male cone of compression gasket. The cone angle of
compression gasket shall be respectively:
=30~35; =5; =5~10.

200
Explanation: 1Top cover; 2Constraining bolt; 3Nut; 4Constraining ring; 5Combined ring; 6Tightening bolt;
7Compression gasket; 8Cylindrical end
Figure C.6 Wood Seal Structure
C.4.3 Load
C.4.3.1 The axial force caused by internal pressure shall be calculated according to Formula (C-15):
F=0.785D2cpc (C-15)
C.4.3.2 At the pre-tightening state, the axial component of the compression gasket sealing force,
namely the load of constraining bolt, shall be calculated according to Formula (C-16):
Fa=3.14Dcq1 (C-16)
Where, the linear sealing specific pressure for carbon steel and low alloy steel shall be q1=200N/mm~
300N/mm. Where steel contacts with steel, =830'; where steel contacts with copper, =1031';
where steel contacts with aluminium, =15.
C.4.4 Constraining ring
The structural dimensions of constraining ring (see Figure C-7) shall be determined. The bending
stress acting on the longitudinal cross section and the equivalent stress acting on the circumferential
cross section aa shall be carried out with strength checking.
Figure C.7 Constraining Ring
C.4.4.1 The bending stress of longitudinal cross section shall be checked according to Formula
(C-17):
201
3Fa ( Da Db )
m = 0.9[]t (C-17)
3.14( D3 D1 2d k ) 2
C.4.4.2 The equivalent stress of the circumferential cross section aa shall be checked according to
Formula (C-18):
oa = ma
2
+ 3 a2 0.9[]t (C-18)
The bending stress ma of the circumferential cross section aa shall be calculated according to
Formula (C-19):
3Fa ( Da Db )
ma = (C-19)
3.14 Da h 2
The cut stress a of the circumferential cross section aa shall be calculated according to Formula
(C-20):
Fa
a = (C-20)
3.14 Da h
Where, the thickness h is given in the note of Figure C.7.
C.4.5 Combined ring
The combined ring is composed of four components, and every component is set with one radial
screw hole (see Figure C.8). The combined ring shall be regarded as one circular ring in calculation.
The cut stress acting on the circumferential cross section aa shall be checked according to Formula
(C-21):
F + Fa
a = 0.9[]t (C-21)
3.14 Da h1 0.785nd k
2
Where, the thickness h1 is given in the note of Figure C.8.
Figure C.8 Combined Ring
C.4.6 Constraining bolt
The design of constraining bolt shall be performed according to those specified in 7.7 of Chapter
202
7, therein, Am is taken as the bolt area required for the pre-tightening state, i.e. Am=Aa, and the bolt
load Wa in Formula (7-7) shall be equal to Fa, Fa shall be calculated according to Formula (C-16).
C.4.7 Top cover
The structural dimensions of top cover (see Figure C.9) shall be determined. The bending stress
acting on the longitudinal cross section and the equivalent stress acting on the circumferential cross
section aa shall be carried out with strength checking.
C.4.7.1 The bending stress of longitudinal cross section shall be checked according to Formula
(C-22):
M
m = 0.7[]t (C-22)
Z
The bending moment M of longitudinal cross section shall be calculated according to Formula
(C-23):
1 2
M= Dc DC F( Dc Db ) Fa (C-23)
6.28 3
1 Ic
For Z c 2 , Z = Z
c
(C-24)
For Z < 1 , Z = I c
c
2 1Zc
Formula (C-25):
oa = ma
2
+ 3 a2 0.7[]t (C-25)
The bending stress ma shall be calculated according to Formula (C-26):

203
6( F + Fa ) L
ma = (C-26)
3.14 D5l 2sin
The cut stress a shall be calculated according to Formula (C-27):
FFa
a = (C-27)
3.14 D5lsin
The average diameter D5 of the circumferential cross section aa of top cover shall be calculated
according to Formula (C-28):
h2
D5=D6 (C-28)
tan
Other symbols are as shown in Figure C.9.
The structural dimensions of cylindrical end (see Figure C.10) shall be determined. The equivalent
stress acting on the circumferential cross sections aa and bb shall be carried out with strength
checking.
Figure C.10 Cylindrical End
Formula (C-29):
oa=a+ma0.9[]t (C-29)
The tensile stress a of the circumferential cross section aa at cylindrical end shall be calculated
204
4( F + Fa )
a = (C-30)
3.14( D02 D72 )
D7 is given in the note of Figure C.10.
6 M max
ma (C-31)
S2
Where, the calculation of the maximum bending moment Mmax per unit length along the circumferential
cross section aa is given in C4.8.3;
The thickness S at the circumferential cross section aa shall be calculated according to Formula
(C-32):
Do D7
S= (C-32)
2
C.4.8.2 The equivalent stress of the circumferential cross section bb shall be checked according to
Formula (C-33):
ob = mb
2
3 b2 0.9[]t (C-33)
The bending stress mb of the circumferential cross section bb shall be calculated according to
Formula (C-34):
3( F + Fa )h3
mb = (C-34)
3.14 D7l12
The cut stress b of the circumferential cross section bb shall be calculated according to Formula
(C-35):
F + Fa
b = (C-35)
3.14 D7l1
C.4.8.3 Maximum bending moment Mmax
C.4.8.3.1 The bending moment M caused by F+Fa shall be calculated according to Formula (C-36):
M=(F+Fa)H (C-36)
Where, the moment arm H shall be calculated according to Formula (C-37)
H=So+0.5h3 (C-37)
The distance So from the neutral surface YY at cylindrical end to the diameter D7 shall be
selected according to Formula (C-38):
205
Do D D7
For 1.45, S o = o
D7 4
(C-38)
For Do D D7 2 Do + D7
> 1.45, S o = o
D7 6 Do + D7
C.4.8.3.2 The bending moment M1 per unit length of neutral surface shall be calculated according to
Formula (C-39):
M
M1 = (C-39)
3.14 Dn
The diameter Dn of the neutral surface YY at cylindrical end shall be calculated according to
Formula (C-40):
Dn=D7+2So (C-40)
C.4.8.3.3 The calculation coefficient shall be calculated according to Formula (C-41):
12(1 2 )
=4 (C-41)
Dn2 S 2
M3 M4
C.4.8.3.4 The values of and shall be obtained by looking up Figure C.11 based on the
M1 M1
l1 value, thus:
M3
M3 = ( )M1 (C-42)
M1
M4
M4 = ( )M1 (C-43)
M1
C.4.8.3.5 Calculation coefficient C shall be calculated according to Formula (C-44):
l2
C= (C-44)
l1
Where, the width l2 is as shown in Figure C.10.
M r
C.4.8.3.6 The value of ( 10) shall be obtained by looking up Figure C.12 based on the l1
qr
value and C value.
C.4.8.3.7 The bending moment Mr per unit length shall be calculated according to Formula (C-45):
M r qr
Mr = ( 10) (C-45)
qr 10
206
Where, the radial load qr per unit length along the neutral surface YY shall be calculated according to
Formula (C-46):
Qr
qr = (C-46)
3.14 Dn
The radial load Qr caused by the sealing counterforce shall be calculated according to Formula
(C-47):
F + Fa
Qr = (C-47)
tan( + )
C.4.8.3.8 The maximum bending moment Mmax shall be taken as the larger value between the
absolute values in Formula (C-48).
M r + M 3
M max = (C-48)
M r M 4
Figure C.11
207
Figure C.12
C.5 Casale Seal
C.5.1 Symbols
bThe width of sealing gasket, mm;
DiThe internal diameter of sealing gasket, mm;
DnThe diameter of neutral surface, mm;
DThe external diameter of threaded sleeve, mm;
DoThe major diameter of screw threads of flat-cover, mm;
D1The internal diameter of compression ring, mm;
D2The external diameter of compression ring, mm;
diThe minor diameter of screw threads of flat-cover, mm;
dkThe diameter of the bolt hole or screw hole, mm;
HThe thickness of compression ring, mm;
H1The moment arm (see Figure C.18), mm;
208
hThe height of sealing gasket, mm;
h1The tooth depth of screw thread (see Figure C.17), mm;
kThe calculation coefficient (see Formula C.85);
l1, l2, l3The characteristic length, mm;
MThe bending moment caused by (F+Fa), N mm;
MmaxThe maximum bending moment per unit length along the circumferential cross section,
N mm/mm;
M1The bending moment per unit length along the neutral surface, N mm/mm;
M2The bending moment caused by Fa, N mm/mm;
M5The bending moment caused by Fa and acting on unit length of the circumferential cross
section aa, N mm/mm;
mThe bending moment per unit length along l1, N mm/mm;
nThe thread turns;
SThe thickness (see Figure C.18), mm;
SoThe distance from the neutral surface YY at cylindrical end to the diameter di, mm;
So1The distance from the neutral surface YY of threaded sleeve to the diameter Do, mm;
S1The thickness (see Figure C.21), mm;
t1The thickness (see Figure C.17), mm;
WaThe bolt load at the pre-tightening state, N;
yThe sealing specific pressure, MPa;
The key groove, ();
The coefficient, mm 1;
pThe thickness of flat-cover, mm;
The Poissons ratio of materials at the average wall temperature;
The friction angle;
The cut stress, MPa;
The tensile stress, MPa;
aThe tensile stress of the circumferential cross section aa, MPa;

209
oThe equivalent stress, MPa;
C.5.2 Structure
The structure of Casale seal is as shown Figure C.13.
Explanation: 1Flat-cover, 2Threaded sleeve; 3Cylindrical end; 4Puller bolt; 5Compression ring;
6Sealing gasket
Figure C.13 Structure of Casale Seal
Both the upper and lower portions of the inner wall of threaded sleeve are machined into saw
tooth threads. In order to make convenience for connection and quick disassembly with the flat-cover,
the upper portion is machined into intermittent saw tooth threads, and the included angle of the
intermittent part shall be 10~30.
C.5.3 Load
C.5.3.1 The total axial force caused by internal pressure shall be calculated according to Formula
(C-49):
F=0.785D2G pc (C-49)
C.5.3.2 The structure of sealing gasket is as shown Figure C.14. The axial component of sealing
force shall be taken as the larger value between the calculated values from Formula (C-50).
3.14 y ( DG b + Di htan )
Fa = (C-50)
3.14 y ( Di h + DG btan )tan( + )
210
Where, the key groove may be 30, 45 or 60. Where steel contacts with steel, =830'; where steel
contacts with copper, =1031'; where steel contacts with aluminium, =15.
C.5.4 Compression ring
The structural dimensions of compression ring (see Figure C.15) shall be determined. The bending
stress acting on the longitudinal cross section shall be checked according to Formula (C-51):
3Fa ( Db DG )
m = 0.9[]t (C-51)
3.14( D2 D1 ) H 2
Figure C.14 Sealing Gasket
Figure C.15 Compression Ring
C.5.5 Puller bolt
The design of puller bolt shall be performed according to those specified in 7.7 of Chapter 7,
therein, Am is taken as the bolt area required for the pre-tightening state, i.e. Am=Aa, and the bolt load
Wa in Formula (7-7) shall be equal to Fa, Fa shall be calculated according to Formula (C-50).
C.5.6 Flat-cover
The structural dimensions of flat-cover (see Figure C.16) shall be determined. The bending stress
acting on the longitudinal cross section and the equivalent stress acting on the intermittent saw tooth
thread shall be carried out with strength checking.
C.5.6.1 The bending stress of longitudinal cross section shall be checked according to Formula (C.52):
2
3[( Do D1 ) F + ( Do Db ) Fa ]
m = 3 0.7[]t (C-52)
3.14[( D1 d i ) p2 + ( Do D1 2d k )h22 ]
Where di=d1+d2+d3+, mm;
211
The thickness h2 is as shown in Figure C.16.
Figure C.17 Saw Tooth Thread
C.5.6.2 The equivalent stress intermittent saw tooth thread shall be checked according to Formula
(C-53):
o = m2 3 2 0.7[]t (C-53)
The bending stress m shall be calculated according to Formula (C-54):
3( F + Fa )( Do d i )
m = (C-54)
3.14d i t12 n
The thickness t1 is as shown in Figure C.17.
The cut stress shall be calculated according to Formula (C-55):
2( F + Fa )
= (C-55)
3.14d it1n
212
The structural dimensions of cylindrical end (see Figure C.18) shall be determined. The equivalent
stress acting on the circumferential cross sections aa shall be carried out with strength checking.
C.5.7.1 The tensile stress shall be calculated according to Formula (C-56):
4( F + Fa )
a = (C-56)
3.14(d i2 Di2 )
C.5.7.2 Bending stress ma
C.5.7.2.1 Maximum bending moment Mmax caused by F+Fa and acting on unit length of the
circumferential cross section aa.
C.5.7.2.1.1 The bending moment caused by F+Fa shall be calculated according to Formula (C.57):
M=(F+Fa)H1 (C-57)
The moment arm H1 shall be calculated according to Formula (C-58):
H1=So+0.5h1 (C-58)
The distance So from the neutral surface YY at cylindrical end to the diameter di shall be selected
di d Di
For 1.45, S o = i
Di 4
(C-59)
For di d Di d i + 2 Di
> 1.45, S o = i
Di 6 d i + Di
C.5.7.2.1.2 The bending moment per unit length along the neutral surface shall be calculated
213
M
M1 = (C-60)
Dn
The diameter Dn of the neutral surface YY at cylindrical end shall be calculated according to
Formula (C.61):
Dn=di2So (C-61)
C.5.7.2.1.3 The bending moment m per unit length along l1 shall be calculated according to Formula
(C-62):
M1
m= (C-62)
l1
Where, the length l1 is as shown in Figure C.18.
C.5.7.2.1.4 The calculation coefficient shall be calculated according to Formula (C-63):
12(1 2 )
= 4 (C-63)
Dn2 S 2
Where, the thickness S is as shown in Figure C.18.

C.5.7.2.1.5 The value of ( Mmax) shall be obtained by looking up Figure C.19 based on l1.
m
C.5.7.2.1.6 The maximum bending moment Mmax shall be calculated according to Formula (C-64):
m
M max = ( M max ) (C-64)
m
C.5.7.2.2 Bending moment M5 caused by Fa and acting on unit length of the circumferential cross
section aa.
C.5.7.2.2.1 The bending moment caused by Fa shall be calculated according to Formula (C-65):
M2=FaH2 (C-65)
Where, the moment arm H2 shall be calculated according to Formula (C-66):
Dn DG
H2 = (C-66)
2
C.5.7.2.2.2 The bending moment per unit length along the neutral surface shall be calculated
M2
M1 = (C-67)
3.14 Dn
C.5.7.2.2.3 The coefficient shall be calculated according to Formula (C-63).
C.5.7.2.2.4 The value of coefficient shall be obtained by looking up Figure C.20 based on the l1
214
value.
C.5.7.2.2.5 The bending moment M5 caused by Fa and acting on unit length of the circumferential
cross section shall be calculated according to Formula (C-68):
M5=M1 (C-68)
Figure C.19
l1>2.35 for =0
Figure C.20
C.5.7.2.3 The bending stress ma shall be calculated according to Formula (C-69):
6( M max + M 5 )
ma = (C-69)
S2
Formula (C-70):
215
oa=ma+a0.9[]t (C-70)
C.5.8 Threaded sleeve
The structural dimensions of threaded sleeve (see Figure C.21) shall be determined. The equivalent
stress acting on the circumferential cross section and the equivalent stress acting on the saw tooth
thread of the lower segment (see Figure C.22) shall be carried out with strength checking.
Figure C.21 Threaded Sleeve
Figure C.22 Saw Tooth Thread
C.5.8.1 The equivalent stress of the circumferential cross section shall be checked according to
Formula (C-71):
o=m+0.9[]t (C-71)
The tensile stress in Formula (C-72) shall be calculated according to Formula (C-72):
4( F + Fa )
= (C-72)
3.14( D 2 Do2 )

216
6 M max
m = (C-73)
S12
The thickness S1 shall be calculated according to Formula (C-74):
D Do
S1 = (C-74)
2
The calculation of the maximum bending moment per unit length along the circumferential cross
section is given in C5.8.3.
C.5.8.2 The equivalent stress at the lower segment of the saw tooth thread on the threaded sleeve
shall be checked according to Formula (C-75):
o = m2 3 2 0.9[]t (C-75)
3( F + Fa )( Do d i )
m = (C-76)
6.28Dot12 n
The cut stress shall be calculated according to Formula (C-77):
F + Fa
= (C-77)
3.14 Do t1n
The internal diameter di and the thickness t1 are as shown in Figure C.22.
C.5.8.3 The maximum bending moment Mmax per unit length along the circumferential cross section:
C.5.8.3.1 The bending moment caused by F+Fa shall be calculated according to Formula (C-78):
M=(F+Fa)H3 (C-78)
H3=So1+0.5h1 (C-79)
The distance So1 from the neutral surface YY at threaded sleeve to the diameter Do shall be
D D Do
For 1.45, S o1 =
Do 4
(C-80)
For D D Do 2 D + Do
> 1.45, S o1 =
Do 6 D + Do
C.5.8.3.2 The bending moment per unit length along the neutral surface shall be calculated according
to Formula (C-81):
M
M1 = (C-81)
3.14 Dn
217
The diameter Dn of the neutral surface YY at threaded sleeve shall be calculated according to
Formula (C-82):
Dn=Do+2So1 (C-82)
C.5.8.3.3 The bending moment m per unit length along the axial direction l1 shall be calculated
M1
m= (C-83)
l1
Where, l1 is as shown in Figure C.21.
12(1 2 )
=4 (C-84)
Dn2 S12

C.5.8.3.5 The value of ( Mmax) shall be determined by looking up Figure C.23 a)~C.23 e)
m
according to l1 and the value of k and C.
l3
k= (C-85)
l1
l2
C= (C-86)
l1
Where, l2 and l3 are as shown in Figure C.21.
C.5.8.3.6 The maximum bending moment Mmax shall be calculated according to Formula (C-87):
m
M max = ( M max ) (C-87)
m
C.5.9 Another two structure forms of Casale seal are as shown in Figure C.24 and Figure C.25.
C.5.9.1 The design of all elements for Casale seal with internal thread shall be in accordance with
that of Casale seal, but the loads which shall be taken into consideration are respectively as follow:
a) Only axial force Fa shall be taken into consideration for the load of bolt and compression
ring, and it shall be calculated according to C.5.3.2;
b) Only axial force F shall be taken into consideration for the load of flat-cover and cylindrical
end, and it shall be calculated according to C.5.3.1.
C.5.9.2 The design calculation of all elements for modified casale seal shall be in accordance with
that of Casale seal, but the design of the king bolt shall be conducted according to the requirements of
7.7 in Chapter 7, in which Am shall be taken as the bolt area required under operating state, namely
Am=Ap, the bolt load Wa shall be calculated according to F+Fa.
218
Figure C.23
219
Figure C.23 (continued)
220
c)
221
d)
222
Explanation: 1Bolt; 2Nut; 3Compression ring; 4Flat-cover; 5Sealing gasket; 6Cylindrical end
Figure C.24 Casale Seal with Internal Thread

223
Explanation: 1King bolt; 2Mother nut; 3Washer; 4Flat-cover; 5Pre-tightening bolt; 6Flange at cylindrical end;
7Compression ring; 8Sealing gasket
Figure C.25 Modified Casale Seal
C.6 Octagonal Ring and Oval Ring Seal
C.6.1 Symbols
bThe effective sealing width of gasket, mm;
mThe gasket factor, mm;
WaThe bolt load under pre-tightening state, N;
WpThe bolt load under operating state, N;
yThe sealing specific pressure, MPa.
C6.2 Structure
The sealing structure of octagonal ring is as shown in Figure C.26, and the sealing structure of
oval ring is as shown in Figure C.27. The structures of octagonal ring, oval ring and ring groove are as
shown in Figure C.28.
The serial structural dimensions of octagonal ring and oval ring seal are detailed in Table C.7.
C.6.3 The hardness of gasket ring materials shall be 30 HBW~40 HBW lower than the hardness of
the materials for ring groove elements. It is recommended to use the forgings of pressure vessels in
Grade III or Grade IV as gasket ring materials, the hardness requirements of the forgings are detailed
in Table C.8.
224
Figure C.26 Octagonal Ring
Figure C.27 Oval Ring
Figure C.28 Sketch of Structural Dimension
Table C.7 Serial Structural Dimension of Octagonal Ring and Oval Ring mm
Pitch diameter Height of gasket ring Width of octagonal Corner radius

Width of Groove Groove Corner radius
Gasket ring of gasket ring horizontal gasket of octagonal
gasket ring Oval Octagon depth width inside groove
No. and groove ring ring
H1 h t W R2
DG a R1
R11 34.14 6.35 11.11 9.53 4.32 1.6 5.54 7.14 0.8
R12 39.67 7.94 14.29 12.70 5.23 1.6 6.35 8.74 0.8
R13 42.88 7.94 14.29 12.70 5.23 1.6 6.35 8.74 0.8
225

H1 h t W R2
DG a R1
R14 44.45 7.94 14.29 12.70 5.23 1.6 6.35 8.74 0.8
R15 47.63 7.94 14.29 12.70 5.23 1.6 6.35 8.74 0.8
R16 50.80 7.94 14.29 12.70 5.23 1.6 6.35 8.74 0.8
R17 57.15 7.94 14.29 12.70 5.23 1.6 6.35 8.74 0.8
R18 60.33 7.94 14.29 12.70 5.23 1.6 6.35 8.74 0.8
R19 65.07 7.94 14.29 12.70 5.23 1.6 6.35 8.74 0.8
R20 68.27 7.94 14.29 12.70 5.23 1.6 6.35 8.74 0.8
R22 82.55 7.94 14.29 12.70 5.23 1.6 6.35 8.74 0.8
R23 82.55 11.11 17.46 15.88 7.75 1.6 7.92 11.91 0.8
R24 95.25 11.11 17.46 15.88 7.75 1.6 7.92 11.91 0.8
R25 101.60 7.94 14.29 12.70 5.23 1.6 6.35 8.74 0.8
R26 101.60 11.11 17.46 15.88 7.75 1.6 7.92 11.91 0.8
R27 107.95 11.11 17.46 15.88 7.75 1.6 7.92 11.91 0.8
R29 114.30 7.94 14.29 12.70 5.23 1.6 6.35 8.74 0.8
R31 123.83 11.11 17.46 15.88 7.75 1.6 7.92 11.91 0.8
R35 136.53 11.11 17.46 15.88 7.75 1.6 7.92 11.91 0.8
R36 149.23 7.94 14.29 12.70 5.23 1.6 6.35 8.74 0.8
R37 149.23 11.11 17.46 15.88 7.75 1.6 7.92 11.91 0.8
R39 161.93 11.11 17.46 15.88 7.75 1.6 7.92 11.91 0.8
R40 171.45 7.94 14.29 12.70 5.23 1.6 6.35 8.74 0.8
R41 180.98 11.11 17.46 15.88 7.75 1.6 7.92 11.91 0.8
R43 193.68 7.94 14.29 12.70 5.23 1.6 6.35 8.74 0.8
R44 193.68 11.11 17.46 15.88 7.75 1.6 7.92 11.91 0.8
R45 211.12 11.11 17.46 15.88 7.75 1.6 7.92 11.91 0.8
R46 211.14 12.70 19.05 17.46 8.66 1.6 9.53 13.49 1.5
R48 247.65 7.94 14.29 12.70 5.23 1.6 6.35 8.74 0.8
R49 269.88 11.11 17.46 15.88 7.75 1.6 7.92 11.91 0.8
R50 269.88 15.88 22.23 20.64 10.49 1.6 11.13 16.66 1.5
R52 304.80 7.94 14.29 12.70 5.23 1.6 6.35 8.74 0.8
R53 323.85 11.11 17.46 15.88 7.75 1.6 7.92 11.91 0.8
R54 323.85 15.88 22.23 20.64 10.49 1.6 11.13 16.66 1.5
R56 381.00 7.94 14.29 12.70 5.23 1.6 6.35 8.74 0.8
R57 381.00 11.11 17.46 15.88 7.75 1.6 7.92 11.91 0.8
R58 381.00 22.23 28.58 26.99 14.81 1.6 14.27 23.01 1.5
R59 396.88 7.94 14.29 12.70 5.23 1.6 6.35 8.74 0.8
R61 419.10 11.11 17.46 15.88 7.75 1.6 7.92 11.91 0.8
226

H1 h t W R2
DG a R1
R62 419.10 15.88 22.23 20.64 10.49 1.6 11.13 16.66 1.5
R63 419.10 25.40 33.34 31.75 17.30 2.4 15.88 26.97 2.4
R64 454.03 7.94 14.29 12.70 5.23 1.6 6.35 8.74 0.8
R65 469.90 11.11 17.46 15.88 7.75 1.6 7.92 11.91 0.8
R66 469.90 15.88 22.23 20.64 10.49 1.6 11.13 16.66 1.5
R67 469.90 28.58 36.51 34.93 19.81 2.4 17.48 30.18 2.4
R68 517.53 7.94 14.29 12.70 5.23 1.6 6.35 8.74 0.8
R69 533.40 11.11 17.46 15.88 7.75 1.6 7.92 11.91 0.8
R70 533.40 19.05 25.40 23.81 12.32 1.6 12.70 19.84 1.5
R71 533.40 25.58 36.51 34.93 19.81 2.4 17.48 30.18 2.4
R72 558.80 7.94 14.29 12.70 5.23 1.6 6.35 8.74 0.8
R73 584.20 12.70 19.05 17.46 8.66 1.6 9.53 13.49 1.5
R74 584.20 19.05 25.40 23.81 12.32 1.6 12.70 19.84 1.5
R75 584.20 31.75 36.69 38.10 22.33 2.4 17.48 33.32 2.4
R76 673.10 7.94 14.29 12.70 5.23 1.6 6.35 8.74 0.8
R77 692.15 15.88 22.23 20.64 10.49 1.6 11.13 16.66 1.5
R78 692.15 25.40 33.34 31.75 17.30 2.4 15.88 26.97 2.4
R79 692.15 34.93 44.45 41.28 24.82 2.4 20.62 36.53 2.4
R82 57.15 11.11 15.88 7.75 1.6 7.92 11.91 0.8
R84 63.50 11.11 15.88 7.75 1.6 7.92 11.91 0.8
R85 79.38 12.70 17.46 8.66 1.6 9.53 13.49 1.5
R86 90.49 15.88 20.64 10.49 1.6 11.13 16.66 1.5
R87 100.01 15.88 20.64 10.49 1.6 11.13 16.66 1.5
R88 123.83 19.05 23.81 12.32 1.6 12.70 19.84 1.5
R89 114.30 19.05 23.81 12.32 1.6 12.70 19.84 1.5
R90 155.58 22.23 26.99 14.81 1.6 14.27 23.01 1.5
R91 260.35 31.75 38.10 22.33 2.4 17.48 33.32 2.4
R93 749.30 19.50 23.90 12.32 1.6 12.70 19.84 1.5
R94 800.10 19.50 23.90 12.32 1.6 12.70 19.84 1.5
R95 857.25 19.50 23.90 12.32 1.6 12.70 19.84 1.5
R96 914.40 22.22 26.90 14.81 1.6 14.27 23.01 1.5
R97 965.20 22.22 26.90 14.81 1.6 14.27 23.01 1.5
R98 1022.35 28.58 26.90 14.81 2.4 14.27 23.01 1.5
R99 234.95 11.11 15.88 7.75 1.6 7.92 11.91 0.8
R100 749.30 31.75 35.10 19.81 2.4 17.48 30.18 2.3
R101 800.10 31.75 38.10 22.33 2.4 17.48 33.32 2.3
227

H1 h t W R2
DG a R1
R102 857.25 31.75 38.10 22.33 2.4 17.48 33.32 2.3
R103 914.40 31.75 38.10 22.33 2.4 17.48 33.32 2.3
R104 965.20 34.92 41.10 24.82 2.4 20.62 36.53 2.3
R105 1022.35 34.92 41.10 24.82 2.4 20.62 36.53 2.3
C.6.4 The tolerance requirements of the gasket ring and the gasket ring groove are detailed in Table
C.9.
Table C.8 Gasket Ring Materials and Its Hardness
Maximum hardness
Material Standard for steel forging
HBW HRB
Carbon steel NB/T 47008 120 70
1Cr5Mo NB/T 47008 130 74
S11306 NB/T 47010 170 87
S30408 NB/T 47010 160 84
S30403 NB/T 47010 150 81
S31608 NB/T 47010 160 84
S31603 NB/T 47010 150 81
Table C.9 Tolerance Range mm
Dimension name Tolerance range
Width of gasket ring 0.20
Height of gasket ring h and h1 0.50
Width of octagonal horizontal gasket ring a 0.20
+0.40
Groove depth t
0
Groove width W 0.20
Average pitch diameter of gasket ring DG 0.18
Average pitch diameter of groove DG 0.13
Corner radius of gasket ring R1 0.50
+0.80
Corner radius inside R22
0
groove R2
R2<2 0.80
Angle 23 0.5
Note 1: The surface roughness Ra at the contact inclined surface (23 to surface) of groove and octagonal ring shall not be larger than
3.2m.
Note 2: The ring height is allowed to have a positive deviation of 1.9mm, but the height difference of the gasket ring at every part of the
circumference shall not be larger than 0.5mm.
228
C.6.5 Bolt load
C.6.5.1 The bolt load under operating state shall be calculated according to Formula (C-88):
Wp = 0.785 DG2 pc + 6.28bDG mpc (C-88)
Where, the effective sealing width of gasket b is specified in 7.5.1.2 of Chapter 7; and the gasket
factor m is detailed in Table 7-2 of Chapter 7.
C.6.5.2 The bolt load under pre-tightening state shall be calculated according to Formula (C-89):
Wa=3.14DGy (C-89)
C.6.6 The design of flat-cover is detailed in 5.9 in Chapter 5.
C.6.7 The design of flange is detailed in Chapter 7.
C.6.8 The design of cylindrical end, bolt and nut shall be in accordance with those specified in 7.7
of Chapter 7.
C.7 Clip Fastened Structure
C.7.1 Symbols
DbThe diameter (see Figure C.30 and C.34), mm;
DcThe diameter of the contact circle for sealing, mm;
DnThe diameter of neutral surface, mm;
DoThe external diameter, mm;
diThe minor diameter of screw thread, mm;
HThe moment arm (see Figure C.31), mm;
hThe height (see Figure C.30), mm;
h1The height (see Figure C.30), mm;
229
l1, l2The characteristic length, mm;
MThe bending moment caused by (F+Fa), N mm;
MmaxThe maximum bending moment per unit length, N mm/mm;
M1The bending moment per unit length along the neutral surface, N mm/mm;
M2The bending moment caused by Fa, N mm;
M3The bending moment per unit length (see Formula C-122), N mm/mm;
M5The bending moment per unit length (see Formula C-127), N mm/mm;
nThe bolt quantity;
SThe thickness (see Figure C.31), mm;
SoThe distance from the neutral surface YY at clip to the diameter D2, mm;
So1The distance from the neutral surface YY at cylindrical end to the diameter D3, mm;
S1The thickness (see Figure C.33), mm;
WThe load for fastening bolt, N;
The angle (see Figure C.34), ();
The coefficient, mm 1;
pThe thickness of flat-cover, mm;
The poissons ratio of materials at the average wall temperature;
bThe cut stress of the circumferential cross section bb, MPa;
aThe tensile stress of the circumferential cross section aa at cylindrical end, MPa;
mbThe bending stress of the circumferential cross section bb, MPa;
obThe equivalent stress of the circumferential cross section bb, MPa;
[]tThe allowable stress of element materials at the design temperature, MPa.
C.7.2 Structure
See Figure C.29 for clip fastened structure. The sealing ring shall be provided with self-fastening
230
function.
Explanation: 1Flat-cover; 2Clip; 3Sealing ring; 4, 5Tightening bolt and tightening nut 6Cylindrical end
Figure C.29 Clip Fastened Structure
C.7.3 Load
C.7.3.1 The axial force caused by internal pressure shall be calculated according to Formula (C-90):
F=0.785 DG2 pc (C-90)
C.7.3.2 The sealing axial force of the sealing ring under pre-tightening state Fa, its value shall be
determined according to the type of the sealing ring.
C.7.4 Flat-cover
The structural dimensions of flat-cover (see Figure C.30) shall be determined, and the bending
stress acting on the longitudinal cross section and the equivalent stress acting on the circumferential
cross section aa shall be carried out with strength checking.
C.7.4.1 The bending stress of the longitudinal cross section shall be checked according to Formula
(C-91):
231
2
3 Db DG F + ( D b DG ) Fa
0.7[]t
m =
3
(C-91)
3.14[( D1 d i ) p + ( Do D1 )h ]
2 2
Where di=d1+d2+d3+;
Formula (C-92):
oa = ma
2
+ 3 a2 0.7[]t (C-92)
The bending stress ma shall be calculated according to Formula (C-.93):
3( F + Fa )( Db D1 )
ma = (C-93)
3.14 D1h12
The cut stress a shall be calculated according to Formula (C-94):
F + Fa
a = (C-94)
3.14 D1h1
C.7.5 Clip
The structural dimensions of clip (see Figure C.31) shall be determined, and the equivalent stress
acting on the circumferential cross sections aa and bb shall be carried out with strength checking.
C.7.5.1 The equivalent stress on circumferential cross section aa shall be checked according to
Formula (C-95):
oa = ma + a 0.9[]t (C-95)
6 M max
ma = (D-96)
S2
The calculation of the maximum bending moment Mmax per unit length along the circumferential
cross section aa is given in C.7.5.3;
The tensile stress a shall be calculated according to Formula (C-97):
4( F + Fa )
a = (C-97)
3.14( Do2 D22
C.7.5.2 The equivalent stress on circumferential cross section bb shall be checked according to
Formula (C-98):
232
ob = mb
2
+ 3 b2 0.9[]t (C-98)
The bending stress mb shall be calculated according to Formula (C-99)
3( F + Fa )h2
mb = (C-99)
3.14 D2l12
The cut stress b shall be calculated according to Formula (C-100):
F + Fa
b = (C-100)
3.14 D2l1
C.7.5.3 Maximum bending moment Mmax
M=(F+Fa)H (C-101)
The moment arm H shall be calculated according to Formula (C-102):
H=So+0.5h2 (C-102)
The distance So from the neutral surface YY at clip to the diameter D2 shall be selected according
to Formula (C-103):
Do D Do
For 1.45,S o =
D2 4
(C-103)
For D D D2 2 Do + Do
> 1.45, S o = o
Do 6 D + Do
to Formula (C-104):
M
M1= (C-104)
3.14 Dn
The diameter Dn of the neutral surface shall be calculated according to Formula (C-105):
Dn=D2+2So (C-105)
12(1 2 )
= 4 (C-106)
Dn2 S 2
The thickness S shall be calculated according to Formula (C-107):
233
Do D2
S= (C-107)
2
C.7.5.3.4 The calculation coefficient C shall be calculated according to Formula (C-108):
l2
C= (C-108)
l1
Where, the length l1 and l2 are as shown in Figure C.31.
Figure C.31 Clip
M
C.7.5.3.5 The value of max shall be determined by looking up Figure C.32 according to the
M1
value of l1 and C.
C.7.5.3.6 The maximum bending moment Mmax shall be calculated according to Formula (C-109):
M
M max = max M 1 (C-109)
M1
The structural dimensions of cylindrical end (see Figure C.33) shall be determined, and the
equivalent stress acting on the circumferential cross sections aa and bb shall be carried out with
strength checking.
C.7.6.1 The equivalent stress on circumferential cross section aa shall be checked according to
234
Formula (C-110):
oa=ma+a0.9[]t (C-110)
6( M 3 + M 5 )
ma = (C-111)
S12
Figure C.32
The calculation of bending moment M3 is detailed in C7.6.3;
The calculation of bending moment M5 is detailed in C7.6.4;
The tensile stress a shall be calculated according to Formula (C-112):
4( F + Fa )
a = (C-112)
3.14( D32 Di2
235
C.7.6.2 The equivalent stress on circumferential cross section bb shall be checked according to
Formula (C-113):
ob = mb
2
+ 3 b2 0.9[]t (C-113)
The bending stress mb shall be calculated according to Formula (C-114):
3( F + Fa )h3
mb = (C-114)
3.14 D3l12
The cut stress b shall be calculated according to Formula (C-115):
F + Fa
b = (C-115)
3.14 D3l1
C.7.6.3 Bending moment M3
M=(F+Fa)H1 (C-116)
H1=So1+0.5h3 (C-117)
The distance So1 from the neutral surface YY at cylindrical end to the diameter D3 shall be
236
D3 D Di
For 1.45, S o1 = 3
Di 4
(C-118)
For D3 D Di D3 + 2 Di
> 1.45, S o1 = 3
Di 6 D3 + Di
C.7.6.3.2 The bending moment per unit length along the neutral surface shall be selected according
to Formula (C-119):
M
M1 = (C-119)
3.14 Dn
The diameter Dn of the neutral surface shall be calculated according to Formula (C-120):
Dn=D32So1 (C-120)
12(1 2 )
=4 (C-121)
Dn2 S12
M3
C.7.6.3.4 The value of shall be determined by looking up Figure C.11 according to l1.
M1
C.7.6.3.5 The bending moment M3 shall be calculated according to Formula (C-122):
M
M 3 = 3 M 1 (C-122)
M1
C.7.6.4 Bending moment M5
C.7.6.4.1 The bending moment caused by Fa shall be calculated according to Formula (C-123):
M2=FaH2 (C-123)
Dn Dc
H2= (C-124)
2
to Formula (C-125):
M2
M 1= (C-125)
3.14 Dn
12(1 2 )
=4 (C-126)
Dn2 S12
237
C.7.6.4.4 The value of coefficient shall be determined by looking up Figure C.20 according to l1.
C.7.6.4.5 The bending moment M5 shall be calculated according to Formula (C-127):
M5=M1 (C-127)
C.7.7 Fastening bolt
Figure C.34 Clip and Fastening Bolt
The bolt quantity on each fastening end at the clip shall be calculated according to Formula
(C-128):
4W
n= (C-128)
3.14[ ]bt d i2
Where, the load of the fastening bolt W shall take the bigger value calculated according to Formula
(C-129);
Db q2 tan( + )

W = sh 2 sin (C-129)
M 1 D2l2 sh 2 + sin
2
Fa
q2 = (C-130)
3.14 DG
l2
= (C-131)
2
e 2 e 2
sh 2 = (C-132)
2
The diameter Db is as shown in Figure (C.34);
The diameter D2 is as shown in Figure (C.31);
The length l2 is as shown in Figure (C.31);
The bending moment M1 is as shown in Formula (C.104);

238
The angle is as shown in Figure (C.34), generally taking =5~7;
The coefficient is as shown in Formula (C.106).
The allowable stress [ ]bt of bolt materials at design temperature shall be selected according to
GB 150.2.
C.7.8 The design of nut shall be in accordance with the requirements of 7.7 in Chapter 7.
239
Appendix D
(Informative)
Structure of Welding Joint
D.1 The forms and dimensions of the welding joints and grooves given in this appendix are determined
based on the principle of constant strength.
Only the structures of some common of welding joints are given in this appendix for reference
and adoption in the design and fabrication; the basic type and dimension of the weld groove are only
for recommendation, the welding procedure for all kinds of welding joints in this appendix must be
adopted after it is evaluated appropriately according to NB/T 47014 (JB/T 4708).
Under the premise of guaranteeing the welding quality, the design on welding joints shall follow
the following principles:
a) The weld filler metal shall be as less as possible;
b) The welding capacity shall be as less as possible and it is easy for operation;
c) Such structural dimensions as the groove angle, root face height and root gap shall be selected
reasonably so as to benefit to groove preparation and complete penetration in order to reduce possibility
of generating various defects;
d) It benefits to welding protection;
e) Select welding materials reasonably;
f) The weld contour shall be as continuous as possible, round and smooth in order to reduce
stress concentration.
D.2 Category A and B welding joint structures
D.2.1 Common Category A and B butt joints
As for Category A and B butt joints, if the thickness of the steel material at both sides is the same,
then the connection type in Figure D.1 may be adopted.
As for Category B welding joints, if the thickness of steels at both sides are unequal, the thick plate
edge may be skived in single-side or double-side, or the thin plate edge may be welded into inclined
plane by adopting surfacing method, which are detailed in the relevant requirements of GB/T 150.4.
D.2.2 Connection of cylinder and head
The butt joint of the cylinder and head may adopt the connection type in Figure D.2.
D.3 Connection of connection pipe, flange and shell
The common joint dimensions for connection of connection pipe, flange and shell are as shown
in the figure in this section, they may also be determined separately according to such specific conditions
as welding method, welding parameter, processing condition and welding location.
The impact of such factors as the component structure, thickness and materials weldability shall
be considered for the selection of groove type.
240
5~10 12~20
605 505
b 11 21
+1
P 1 2+1
Application scope: steel plate splicing, longitudinal and circumferential weld of cylinder
a)
20~60
124
b 2 +12
P 21
R 6 +12
Application scope: circumferential weld of thick cylinder
b)
16~60
555
b 21
P 2+1
Application scope: steel plate splicing, longitudinal weld of cylinder
c)
241
30~90 92~150
62 42
b 11
P 21
R 6+1
Application scope: steel plate splicing, longitudinal weld of cylinder
d)
30~60 65~90 95~130
102 82 62
705
b 0+2
P 31
H 101
R 101
Application scope: circumferential weld of cylinder
e)
5~30
405
b 7+1
Application scope: circumferential weld with penetration requirements, cannot be conducted with welding by both sides
f)
242
22
102
b 2+0.5
P 1+0.5
R 51
Application scope: longitudinal and circumferential weld with full penetration requirements, cannot be conducted with welding by both
sides
g)
Note: Figure (g) is applicable to welding joints by single-side manual arc welding with argon arc welding scratch coat or similar
welding method scratch coat. Generally, the full penetration requirements are met.
Figure D.1
Length of straight edge
Parallel length
Tangent
line
Tangent line
Length of straight edge
a) The thickness of the head and cylinder is uniform b) The head thickness is larger than cylinder thickness and
the center line deviates
Tangent line
Parallel length
Tangent
line
Straight edge
c) The head thickness is larger than cylinder thickness d) The head thickness is less than cylinder thickness and
the center line deviates
243
Surfacing
Tangent line
Tangent line
e) The head thickness is less than cylinder thickness f) The head thickness is less than cylinder thickness
Note 1: The skiving in Figure b), Figure c) and Figure d) may be done inside or outside, the slope of the inner side or outer side may
1
be unsymmetrical, but the deviation of two center lines shall be less than or equal to (hn).
2
Note 2: The butt joint in Figure b) and Figure c) may be located in the conical section or cone transition zone. The required cone
length L shall not exceed the tangent line of the head.
Note 3: In Figure e), the cone transition may be formed by adopting surfacing before processing groove. The magnetic particle or
penetrant testing shall be conducted for the whole surface fused of the surfacing metal as required.
Note 4: The groove type of the joint shall be determined from design; the groove represented in the figure is only for explanation.
Note 5: In Figure d), the distance from the starting point of the cone transition zone to the tangent line may also be left a straight
section of 10mm~12mm by making reference to Figure f).
Figure D.2
D.3.1 Plug-in connection pipe
The connection of plug-in connection pipe and shell is as shown in Figure D.3~Figure D.5. The
clearance between the connection pipe and shell shall not be larger than 3mm. Under the following
application conditions, the corner place of the inside diameter of the connection pipe shall be done
with rounding. Generally, the radius of rounded corner shall adopt the smaller value between nt/4 and
19mm.
a) Pressure vessel under alternating loads;
b) Low temperature pressure vessel;
c) Low alloy steel vessels with the lower limit value of standard tensile strength Rm540MPa;
d) Vessels with stress corrosion that indicated in the drawing.
D.3.1.1 Connection pipe without reinforcing ring
The connection of the connection pipe without reinforcing ring and the shell is as shown in
Figure D.3 and Figure D.4. Therein, the welding joints with non-full penetration section is detailed in
Figure D.3, it is not applicable to the situation with rapid temperature gradient and forbidden situation
specified in other laws and regulations. T joint in full penetration is as shown in Figure D.4.
244
2 1
H= ; K = ; and not less than 6mm; H=m; Knt, and not less than 6mm
3 nt 1 2 nt
Where nt<6mm, K=nt; where nt6mm, K6mm
a) b)
1 2 1 2
K nt; and not less than 6mm; H= nt K nt; and not less than 6mm; H= nt; H1=nt
2 3 2 3
c) d)
Note 1: Figure a) and Figure b) are applicable to the carbon steel and carbon manganese steel with shell thickness n16mm or
n
austenitic steel with n25mm, and nt< .
2
n
Note 2: Generally, Figure c) and Figure d) are applicable where nt and n50mm.
2
Figure D.3
245
n n
K , and not less than 6mm; n16mm K , and not less than 6mm; K16mm
3 3
a) b)
n n
K , and not less than 6mm; n25mm K , and not less than 6mm; K16mm
3 3
c) d)
K0.15nt, and not less than 6mm K0.33nt, and not less than 6mm
e) f)
246
K0.15nt, and not less than 6mm; K0.3nt, and not less than 6mm;
Where n50mm, H=10mm; Where n50mm, H=10mm;
Where n>50mm, H=15mm. Where n>50mm, H=15mm.
g) h)
Note 1: When the plug-in connection pipe is adopted with full penetration connection, it shall have inner side back gouging and
welding conditions. Only when the welding procedure that guarantees complete penetration is adopted, then the single
welding weld as shown in Figure a) and Figure c) may be adopted.
1
Note 2: Generally, the joint as shown in the figure are applicable where nt n.
2
Note 3: If the effective thickness of the welding joints exceeds 16mm, then the single J groove type shall be selected preferentially.
Figure D.4
D.3.1.2 Connection pipe with reinforcing ring

The connection of the connection pipe with reinforcing ring and the shell is as shown in Figure
D.5. These structures are not applicable to situation with rapid temperature gradient. The reinforcing
ring shall fit closely with the shell and the telltale hole shall be set.
Where c8mm, K=c; c8mm, Where c8mm, K=c;
K=0.7c, and not less than 8mm; Where c8mm, K=0.7c, and not less than 8mm;
1 2
K1 , and not less than 6mm K16mm; H=
3 nt 3 nt
a) b)
247
Where c8mm, K=c; where c>8mm, Where c8mm, K=c;
K=0.7c, and not less than 8mm; K16mm Where c>8mm, K=0.7c, and not less than 8mm;
nt
K1 ; and not less than 6mm
3
Adopt welding procedure with complete penetration
c) d)
K1=nt, and not less than 6mm; K1=nt, and not less than 6mm;
Where c8mm, K2=c; Where c8mm, K2=c;
Where c>8mm, K2=max (0.7c, 8); Where c>8mm, K2=max(0.7c, 8);
H=0.7nt; H1=0.7nt, H2=nt
e) f)
Figure D.5
D.3.2 Built-in connection pipe
The connection of the built-in connection pipe and shell is as shown in Figure D.6. Generally,
Figure D5a) is applicable to the connection of the connection pipe at center position of the spherical
head and ellipsoidal head and the head or other special positions.
248
Where n50mm, H=10mm;
Where n>50mm, H=15mm
a) b)
Figure D.6
D.3.3 Abutting connection pipe
The structure of abutting connection pipe is as shown in Figure D.7. When this structure is adopted,
the steel plate section of the shell opening shall be free from delamination.
No root gap No root gap
Machining after welding

Machining after welding
Final internal diameter Final internal diameter
nt nt
K ; and not less than 6mm K ; and not less than6mm
3 3
a) b)
249
nt nt
K ; and not less than 6mm; K ; and not less than 6mm
3 3
h=nt and not less than 13mm
c) d)
Note 1: Generally, the types in Figure a) and Figure b) are adopted if the ratio of the connection pipe diameter to the shell diameter is
smaller.
Note 2: Generally, Figure c) is applicable if the internal diameter of the connection pipe is less than or equal to 100mm.
Note 3: Figure d) is applicable to the carbon steel and carbon-manganese steel vessels with shell thickness n16mm or the austenitic
steel vessels with n25mm. In Figure d), the internal diameter of the connection pipe shall be larger than 50mm but be less
than or equal to 150mm, and the wall thickness shall be nt>6mm.
Note 4: Generally, Figure c) and Figure d) are applicable to opening in flat-cover; it also may be used to opening on cylinder.
Figure D.7
D.3.4 Flange
D.3.4.1 Fillet weld connection
The flange of fillet weld connection is as shown in Figure D.8. This structure is not applicable to
vessels under pulsating load. The fillet weld size depends on the transmission load size and the
fabrication and service requirements shall be considered; in general situation, the waist height of fillet
weld shall not be less than 0.7 times of the thickness of thinner one between two-phase weldments
and shall not be less than 6mm in any case.
The internal fillet welding shall be

allowed to conduct at the internal
diameter side
The ring and shell shall

be closely fitted
a) b) c)
Figure D.8
D.3.4.2 Butt joint connection
250
The flange of butt joint connection is as shown in Figure D.9. It is applicable to vessels under
pulsating load.
K6mm K6mm
a) b)
n2
K6mm r ; and not less than 5mm
4
c) d)
Figure D.9
D.3.4.3 Minor diameter flange and connection pipe
The structure of minor diameter flange and connection pipe is as shown in Figure D.10. The
nominal diameter of the flange and connection pipe direct connected with the shell shall be equal to or
less than 50mm. Therein, Figure b), Figure c) and Figure d) are applicable to carbon steel and carbon
manganese steel vessel with shell thickness n16mm or austenitic steel vessel with n25mm generally.
The total thickness of the shell and surfacing layer in Figure a) shall meet screw thread number
requirements.
Machining allowance
Surfacing metal
n and not larger than 10mm

2
d=n (maximum); D=2d
a)
251
K shall not be less than 1.0 times of the thickness of the thinner one of weldment
b)
c) d)
Figure D.10
D.4 Connection of Flat Head and Pressure Components
The connection of flat head and pressure components is as shown in a)~l) in Figure D.11.
H1.25n; P=2mm~3mm; K0.25n, and K5mm; b6mm;
R=6mm~13mm; b3mm and Hn or 6mm (which is smaller)
a) b)
252
n n
K= , and not less than 6mm; K= , and not less than 6mm;
3 3
P=2mm~3mm P=2mm~3mm, R=6mm~10mm
c) d)
2
Sn+3, and not larger than 6mm 1 , and 1n, and not less than 5mm; r1.5n
3 p
Adopt welding procedure with complete penetration
e) f)
The subplate may be adopted.
a2n; Kn a2n a+b2n; an
g) h) i)
253
The shell may
be extended
a1+a22n;
0.5a2a12a2
j) k) l)
Note: Figure e) is applicable to carbon steel and carbon-manganese steel with n16 and tensile strength not exceeding 432MPa, and it
is not recommended to apply it on such vessels under corrosion and fatigue operating conditions.
Figure D.11
D.5 Overlapping Connection of Convex Head to Cylinder
The length of the straight edge of the ellipsoidal head and dished head with the convex or concave
face under pressure shall not be less than the requirements given in Figure D.12. For the head fitted
inside or outside the cylinder, its straight section shall be fitted closely with the cylinder.
Tangent line
Tangent line
Butt weld
Slope (optional) Sealing weld or fillet weld
b3h, and not larger than 38mm; L2h b2h, and not larger than 25mm;
Kh; K11.3h Thickness of n1 and n2 may be different
a) b)
Note: As for the structure shown in Figure b), the shear stress in the design shall be taken as 1.5 times of the pressure difference that
may coexist at both sides. The allowable stress of butt weld is 70% of that of cylinder materials, and the allowable stress of fillet
weld is 55% of that of cylinder materials.
Figure D.12
D.6 Connection Between Lateral Plates of Rectangular Vessel
Connection between lateral plates of rectangular vessel is as shown in D.13.
254
Subplate may adopt intermittent fillet weld
a) b)
Figure D.13
D.7 Connection of Apron Support and Head
The connection between apron support and head of the vertical vessel is as shown in Figure
D.14.
Tangent line Tangent line
a) b)
Tangent line
Tangent line
c) d)
Figure D.14
255
D.8 Layered Vessel
D.8.1 The Category B welding joints between the cylinders of equal thickness are as shown in Figure D.15.
Figure a) and Figure b) show the connection between multilayer cylinder and single-layer cylinder,
Figures c), d) and e) show the connection between multilayer cylinders; and Figures f) and g) show
the connection between the multilayer cylinders that are set with stainless steel inner cylinder.
Backing overlay
Subplate Positioning welding
Hidden layer subplate
Hidden layer Inner cylinder
Overlay
Overlay (edge weld)
(edge weld)
Note: As for the structure shown in Figure b), if the single-layer cylinder requires the post-weld heat treatment, generally a layer of
welding materials with thickness equal to or larger than 3mm and not requiring post-weld heat treatment shall be overlaid on the
machined groove face in order to avoid conducting post-weld stress relief heat treatment on this circumferential weld, and the
single-layer cylinder shall be heat-treated after overlaying, and then it shall be welded with the multilayer cylinder. However,
the above-mentioned requirements exclude the condition that the multilayer cylinder requires conducting the post-weld heat
treatment.
Figure D.15
256
D.8.2 The Category B welding joints between the cylinders of unequal thickness are as shown in
Figure D.16.
The connection between those cylinders of unequal thickness shall adopt the transitional form as
shown in Figure D.16. Therein, Figure a) and Figure b) show the connection between multilayer cylinders
of unequal thickness; Figures c), d), e) and f) show the connection between multilayer cylinder and
the single-layer cylinder of unequal thickness. The length of the sloped edge in transition section shall
be L3Y. The Transitional section may be located at one side or both sides of the cylinder wall.
L or Y Inclination line
Weld (optional)
Weld line (circumferential weld)

Weld (optional)
Layer plate thickness L>16mm Layer plate thickness L16mm

a) b)
See Figure (a) See Figure (b)
Arbitrary weld line (circumferential weld)
c) d)

e) f)
Figure D.16
257
D.8.3 Connection of multilayer cylinder and head, see Figure D.17.
Butt weld
Weld (Circumferential weld)
Tangent line
Inclination line
Used in oblique layer
a) b)
Inclination line
Butt weld
Inclination line Tangent line
Layer plate thickness L22mm Layer plate thickness L16mm
c) d)
Tangent line
Inclination line
Weld (optional)
Weld (optional)
Layer plate thickness L>16mm Layer plate thickness L>16mm
e) f)
258
Tangent line
Weld line
n
Layer plate thickness L22mm Layer plate thickness L16mm; YL Layer plate thickness (optional): Y
2
g) h) i)
Note 1: Figures a), b), c) and d) are only used for the connection of hemispherical head and cylinder.
Note 2: In Figures e), f), h) and i), the butt welding joints of head and cylinder may be located at or below the tangent line of head.
Figure D.17
D.8.4 Connection of multilayer cylinder and flange, see Figure D.18.
Weld line
Weld line
a) b) c)
Figure D.18
D.8.5 Connection of multilayer cylinder and connection pipe, see Figure D.19.
Surface shall AA cross section

be leveled
a) b)
259
c) d)
Clearance Integrally
between lining reinforced cylinder
plates
e) f)
Note 1: The radius of rounded corner r1min shall be taken as nt/4 or 19mm, whichever is smaller; r26 mm; r3min=r1min; tc6mm, or
shall not be less than 0.7 times of the smaller value between nt and 19 mm.
Note 2: As for the structures as shown in Figure e) and f), measures shall be taken to prevent external foreign bodies from entering
into the clearance between layer plate and external diameter of connection pipe, however, the seal welding shall not be welded.
Note 3: As for the structure as shown in Figure e), generally the opening with nominal pipe diameter larger than DN50mm is
applicable.
Figure D.19
D.8.6 Support, see Figure D.20.
Lug support or ring support

Lug support or ring support (if necessary)
(if necessary)
Internal diameter
Internal diameter
Support plate or ring
Hemispherical end
(see the Notes)
Subplate bracing layer
(complete ring) Support plate or ring
a) b)
260
Whole or part of support
plate (if necessary)
c)
Note: As for the non-hemispherical head, the action of discontinuous stress shall be specially considered.
Figure D.20
D.9 End Welded Structure of Flat Steel Ribbon Wound Vessel
End welded structure of flat steel ribbon wound vessel is as shown in Figure D.21. The requirements
of this structure, like the application scope, are detailed in Appendix B of GB/T 150.3.
Steel ribbon layer Protective cover Weld
Inner cylinder
Head or flange
Figure D.21
D.10 Sealing Structure of Jacket
D.10.1 Connection of the jacket sealing piece and the inner container is as shown in Figure D.22~
Figure D.24.
D10.2 The connection of pipe orifice and flange when crossing through the jacket sealing piece is as
shown in Figure D.25.
261
See the Notes See the Notes
a) b) c)
Note 1: The sealing piece may form into one integral structure with the jacket shell or adopt the fully penetrated structure (subplates
may be used).
Note 2: This figure is only applicable to the jacket of cylindrical vessel.
Figure D.22
ej ej
a) b)
Subplate may
be adopted
ej
c) d)
Note 1: b0.75c or 0.75n, whichever is smaller.
Note 2: Figures a), b), c) and d) are only applicable to the jacket welded at the cylinder portion.
pc
Note 3: In this Figure: jC16mm; c is equal to 2j or 0.707j +C, whichever is larger.
[ ] t
Figure D.23
262
a) b) c)
Note 1: b+e1.5n or 1.5c, whichever is smaller.
Note 2: As for the jacket only used for the cylinder portion, the thickness c of the seal ring shall be calculated according to Note 3 in
Figure 23.
Note 3: As for the jacketed vessel having jacket at the head portion, the thickness of seal ring and the maximum allowable clearance
width between jackets shall be determined according to the following formula:
pc Rs j
c 1.414 +C
[ ]t
2[ ]t n2
j= 0.5( n + j )
pc R j
Note 4: The minimum fillet weld size required in the groove welding or fillet welding that is adopted in order to guarantee the required
minimum value of (b+e).
Figure D.24
a) b)
263
c)
Figure D.25
D.11 Connection of Non-pressure Accessories and Pressure Components
Generally, the connection of non-pressure accessories and pressure components shall adopt the
continuous welding, and the structural types, like fillet weld, partial penetration and full penetration,
may be adopted according to specific conditions.
The fillet weld height of T joint and the depth a of partial penetration shall not be less than 1/4 of
the thickness S of connection piece, as shown in Figure D.26 a) and b). In Figure D.26 a), the leg
height a of fillet weld may also be taken as the thickness of the thinner one among the weldments.
The leg height of lap fillet weld between subplate and vessel wall and the depth b of partial
penetration shall not be less than 1/2 of the thickness S of connection piece, as shown in Figure D.26 c)
and d). In Figure D.26 c), the weld leg height b in relation to the reinforcing ring may be taken as 70%
of the thickness of reinforcing ring and shall not be less than 8mm, when the thickness of reinforcing
ring is less than 8mm.
The full penetration welded structure of T joint is as shown in Figure D.26 e), which generally is
applicable to the accessories, like lifting lug, of the equipments bearing relatively big load as well as
the connection of vessel wall or its subplates.
Non-pressure accessory Non-pressure accessory
Pressure component Pressure component
a) b)
264
Non-pressure accessory (subplate)
Pressure
component Non-pressure accessory
Pressure component
(subplate)
c) d)
Non-pressure accessory
Pressure component
e)
Figure D.26
D.12 Miscellaneous
The basic forms and dimensions of weld groove not given in this appendix may be referred to
those specified in GB/T 985.1 and GB/T 985.2.
The fabrication organization may make appropriate correction to the given basic forms and
dimensions of the grooves of welding joints according to the specific conditions, like the adopted
welding method, under the premise of ensuring the welding quality and the design requirements.
The connection of the pipe sheet to the cylinder body may be referred to GB 151, and the
connection of flanges to the cylinder body and the dimensions of the connection structure of clad plate
welding joints may be referred to the relevant standards and codes.
265
Appendix E
(Normative)
Basic Design Requirements for Low Temperature Pressure Vessels
E.1 General Provisions
E.1.1 This appendix is applicable to the design of carbon steel and low alloy steel low temperature
vessels (design temperature lower than 20). The design of austenitic steel low temperature pressure
vessels (design temperature lower than 196) shall be carried out according to relevant code standards.
E.1.2 Those not specified in this appendix shall meet the requirements of relevant chapters of this
standard.
E.1.3 As for carbon steel and low alloy steel vessels, where the metal temperature of the shell is
lower than 20 due to the influence of ambient temperature, the provisions given in this Appendix
also shall be followed.
Note: Ambient temperature refers to the minimum of the monthly average minimum air temperature of the vessel service area in the
pass years. The monthly average minimum air temperature is the quotient of the sum of minimum air temperature of the days
in the current month divided by the number of days in that month.
E.1.4 As for carbon steel and low alloy steel vessels, where the shell or the pressure components are
used under low temperature and low stress condition, if the sum of the design temperature and 50
(for vessels without post-weld heat treatments) is not lower than 20, unless otherwise specified,
they must meet the requirements of low temperature vessels.
The lower temperature and lower stress service refers to the operating condition that the design
temperature of shell or its pressure components is lower than 20, but the design stress (under this
design condition, the maximum memberane and bending primary stress that the vessel components
actually bear) is less than or equal to 1/6 of the standard normal temperature yield strength of steels
and is not larger than 50MPa.
Note: Primary stress is the necessary normal stress or cut stress for balancing the pressure with other mechanical loads.
E.2 Design
E.2.1 The low temperature vessel steels shall meet the relevant requirements of of GB 150.2, and
the allowable stress them shall be selected according to that of corresponding materials at 20, or be
determined in accordance with GB 150.12011.
E.2.2 Where shell or pressure components are used under low temperature and low stress condition,
materials may be selected according to the sum of the design temperature and 50 (as for vessels
without post-weld heat treatments, plus 40), but it is not applicable to Q235 series steel plates.
Low temperature and low stress condition is not applicable to the materials with the standard
tensile strength lower limit value Rm540MPa of steels.
Low temperature and low stress condition is not applicable to bolt materials; the difference
between the design temperature of bolt and shell shall be taken into account for the selection of bolt
materials.
E.2.3 The structrual design of vessels shall take full consideration of the following factors:
266
a) The structure shall be as simple as possible, and be less restraints;
b) Steep temperature gradient shall be avoided;
c) Abrupt change of structural geometry shall be avoided so as to minimize local stresses;
d) The connecting part between nozzle and shell shall be in smooth transition, and the inner
wall of nozzle end shall be rounded;
e) Subplate shall be provided between vessel supports or legs, and direct contact between them
shall be prohibited.
E.2.4 The welded joints of vessels shall be adopted according to the following requirements:
a) For Category A and B welded joints, double-welded or the equivalentce of full penetration
butt joints shall be adopted.
b) For Category B welded joints, where double-welded cannot be adopted due to structural
limitation, single-welded butt joints that the subplates will not be dismantled after welding may be
adopted.
c) For Catergory C welded joints, the following types may be adopted:
1) As for the junctions between flat-cover and cylinder, total section penetration butt joints
or T joints shall be adopted;
2) As for the junctions between flat welding flange or flange bonnet and cylinder, total
section penetration structure shall be adopted; non-total section penetration structure is
adopted, it is only applicable to the following range:
The design temperature t30 or the design pressure p1.0MPa;
Standard tensile strength lower limit of steels Rm<540MPa;
3) As for the junctions between such parts as the spherical cap head, the conical shell with
half vertex angle larger than 30, the flat-cover and the pipe sheet with the shell: all
shall adopt the total section penetration structure.
d) For Catergory D welded joints, the following types may be adopted:
1) As for the junctions between plug-in, abutting connection nozzle, abutting nozzle as
well as lip with shell, nozzles with reinforcing ring and shell connection weld all shall
adopt total section penetration structures;
2) Incomplete penetration is not allowed in the fillet weld lapped by reinforcing ring and
shell.
e) For Category E welded joints, intermittent welding and spot welding shall be avoided unless
there is structural requirement.
f) Cross weld shall not be adopted for shell splicing.
267

GB150 3-2011en PDF

Transféré par

Informations du document

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

GB150 3-2011en PDF

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

GB

National Standard of the Peoples Republic of China

Issue on: November 21, 2011 Implemented on: March 1, 2012

Issued by: General Administration of Quality Supervision, Inspection and Quarantine

3 Cylinders and Spherical Shells Under Internal Pressure....................................................................2

4 Cylinder and Spherical Shell Under External Pressure......................................................................4

6 Openings and Reinforcements .........................................................................................................70

Appendix A (Normative) Noncircular Cross Section Vessels .............................................................150

Appendix B (Normative) Flat Steel Ribbon Wound Cylinder.............................................................187

Appendix C (Informative) Seal Structure ............................................................................................191

Appendix D (Informative) Structure of Welding Joint ........................................................................240

Part 1: General Requirements;

Part 4: Fabrication, Inspection and Testing, and Acceptance.

On the basis of Chapter 5~Chapter 9, Appendix C, Appendix D, Appendix G and Appendix J of

Corresponding to Chapter 5 Cylinder and Spherical shell Subjected to Internal Pressure of

Corresponding Chapter 6 Cylinder and Spherical shell Subjected to External Pressure of

c) The structural design of reinforcing ring is modified partially.

b) The K coefficient of parts of flat-covers is adjusted;

Corresponding to Chapter 8 Opening and Reinforcements of the former GB 1501998,

Corresponding to Chapter 9 Flanges of the former GB 1501998, the main changes in

The contents relevant to design in Appendix C Low Temperature Pressure Vessels of GB

Contents of Appendix D, Appendix G and Appendix J of GB 1501998 are included in

The main adjusted or changed contents are:

a) Appendix B Flat Steel Ribbon Wound Cylinder is added;

b) In Appendix C, the application scope of double-cone ring seal is enlarged;

c) In Appendix D, the welded structure is arranged and supplemented again according to

The previous editions of the standard replaced by this part are:

GB 1501989 and GB 1501998.

GB 150.12011 Pressure VesselsPart 1: General Requirements

GB 150.2 Pressure VesselsPart 2: Materials

GB 150.4 Pressure VesselsPart 4: Fabrication, Inspection and Testing, and Acceptance

GB/T 985.2 Recommended Joint Preparation for Submerged Arc Welding

JB/T 4700 Type and Specification for Pressure Vessel Flanges

JB/T 4701 A-type Socket-weld Flange

JB/T 4702 B-type Socket-weld Flange

JB/T 4703 Welding Neck Flange

JB/T 4704 Nonmetallic Gaskets

JB/T 4705 Spiral Wound Gaskets

JB/T 4706 Double-jacketed Gaskets

JB/T 4707 Stud Bolts

JB/T 4736 Reinforcing Ring

3.2 Terms, Definitions and Symbols

DiThe internal diameter of cylinder or spherical shell, mm;

DoThe external diameter of cylinder or spherical shell (Do=Di+2n), mm;

pcThe design pressure, MPa;

[pw]The maximum allowable operating pressure of cylinder or spherical shell, MPa;

The calculated thickness of the cylinder or spherical shell, mm;

nThe effective thickness of cylinder or spherical shell, mm;

nThe nominal thickness of cylinder or spherical shell, mm;

Welding joint coefficient;

3.3 Cylinder calculation

The value of t shall be less than or equal to []t.

Where: i=1.0, o=0.95.

3.4 Spherical shell calculation

The value of t shall be less than or equal to []t.

4 Cylinder and Spherical Shell Under External Pressure

4.2 Terms, definitions and symbols

AThe gauge factor for external pressure;

AsThe cross sectional area of the reinforcing ring, mm2;

BThe stress coefficient for external pressure, MPa;

CThe additions to the thickness (according to GB150.1), mm;

DiThe internal diameter of cylinder, mm;

DoThe external diameter of cylinder (Do=Di+2n), mm;